CANON POWERSHOT SX730 HS User Manual

Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
ENGLISH  
Camera User Guide  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.  
: Next page  
Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.  
: Previous page  
Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.  
: Page before you clicked a link  
Accessories  
To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.  
Appendix  
Index  
© CANON INC. 2017  
CT0-D143-A  
1
Before Use  
Preliminary Notes and Legal  
Information  
Conventions in This Guide  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera  
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.  
Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images  
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries  
and affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential  
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,  
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be  
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.  
The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.  
Numbers in parentheses indicate the numbers of corresponding  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
[
[
[
[
[
] Up button (12) on back  
] Left button (8) on back  
] Right button (13) on back  
] Down button (15) on back  
] Control dial (7) on back  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
The user’s unauthorized photographing or recording (video and/or  
sound) of people or copyrighted materials may invade the privacy of  
such people and/or may violate others’ legal rights, including copyright  
and other intellectual property rights, even when such photographing  
or recording is intended solely for personal use.  
Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in  
brackets.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
: Important information you should know  
: Notes and tips for expert camera use  
The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of  
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before  
contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.  
=
xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents  
a page number)  
Although the screen (monitor) is produced under extremely high-  
precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the  
pixels meet design specifications, in rare cases some pixels may be  
defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate  
camera damage or affect recorded images.  
Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.  
For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as  
the “memory card”.  
Accessories  
The symbols “ Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate  
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.  
When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become  
warm. This does not indicate damage.  
Appendix  
Index  
3
 
Before Use  
Part Names  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
( )  
( )( ) ( ) ( ) ( )  
( ) ( )  
10 11  
4
5
6
7
8
9
( )  
1
( )  
2
( ) ( )  
3
4
Camera Basics  
( )  
1
( )  
2
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
( )  
3
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
(
(
)
( )  
11  
6
)
12  
( )  
7
( )  
(
13  
(
14  
(
15  
)
)
)
8
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
(
)
(
)
(
14  
)
12 13  
( )  
9
(
16  
)
(
)
10  
( )  
5
(1) Microphone  
(2) Lamp  
(6) Mode dial  
(7) Shutter button  
(8) Power button  
(9) Flash  
(1) Screen (monitor)  
(2) Speaker  
(9) Indicator  
(10)  
(11)  
(12)  
[
[
(Playback)] button  
(Wi-Fi)] button  
(3) Lens  
(3) DIGITAL terminal  
(4) HDMITM terminal  
(4) Zoom lever  
[
[
(Exposure compensation)] /  
(Story Highlights)] / Up  
Accessories  
Shooting:[  
[
(telephoto)] /  
(wide angle)]  
(10)  
(11)  
(N-Mark)*  
(Flash pop up)] switch  
(5) Serial number (Body number)  
button  
[
Playback:[ (magnify)] /  
Appendix  
(6)  
[
[
(Framing Assist – Seek)] /  
(13)  
[ (Flash)] / Right button  
(12) Tripod socket  
[
(index)]  
(Single-image erase)] button  
(14) FUNC. (Function) / SET button  
(13) Memory card/battery cover  
(14) Strap mount  
Index  
(5) Movie button  
(7) Control dial  
(15)  
[
(Information)] / Down  
(8)  
[
[
(Macro)] /  
button  
* Used with NFC features ( 115).  
(Manual focus)] / Left button  
(16)  
[
] button  
You can turn the control dial to perform  
most of the operations possible with the  
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons, such as choosing  
items and switching images.  
4
   
Before Use  
Table of Contents  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
5
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
6
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
7
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Using Bluetooth® Features ...................................................... 112  
Appendix  
Index  
8
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
9
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
10  
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
11  
Applying special effects  
Vivid Colors  
Before Use  
Common Camera Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Poster Effect  
Smooth Skin  
Shoot  
(
(
Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)  
Camera Basics  
-
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
See several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined  
settings (Creative Shot Mode)  
Fish-Eye Effect  
Miniature Effect  
Toy Camera Effect  
(
(
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
-
Shoot yourself under optimal settings (Self Portrait)  
-
Soft Focus  
Monochrome  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Shooting people well  
(
(
Focus on faces  
-
Portraits  
Without using the flash (Flash Off)  
(
-
Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)  
Matching specific scenes  
-
Accessories  
Add a date stamp  
-
Appendix  
Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)  
Sports  
Night Scenes  
Low Light  
Fireworks  
Index  
-
(
(
(
12  
 
Before Use  
View  
Save  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
View images (Playback Mode)  
Save images to a computer  
-
-
Use Wi-Fi Features  
Send images to a smartphone  
Automatic playback (Slideshow)  
-
Camera Basics  
On a TV  
-
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
-
On a computer  
Share images online  
-
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
-
Browse through images quickly  
Send images to a computer  
-
-
Erase images  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
-
Create an album automatically  
-
Record/View Movies  
Record movies  
-
Accessories  
View movies (Playback Mode)  
-
Print  
Print pictures  
Appendix  
Index  
-
13  
Observe the following instructions when using commercially available  
Before Use  
batteries or provided battery packs.  
Safety Instructions  
- Use batteries/battery packs only with their specified product.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
- Do not heat batteries/battery packs or expose them to fire.  
Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product  
safely.  
- Do not charge batteries/battery packs using non-authorized battery  
chargers.  
Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of  
the product or others.  
- Do not expose the terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with  
metallic pins or other metal objects.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
- Do not use leaking batteries/battery packs.  
Denotes the risk of serious injury or death.  
WARNING  
- When disposing of batteries/battery packs, insulate the terminals  
with tape or other means.  
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.  
If a battery/battery pack leaks and the material contacts your skin or  
clothing, flush the exposed area thoroughly with running water. In case of  
eye contact, flush thoroughly with copious amounts of clean running water  
and seek immediate medical assistance.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Keep the product out of the reach of young children.  
A strap wrapped around a person’s neck may result in strangulation.  
The accessory shoe cover is dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, seek  
immediate medical assistance.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Use only power sources specified in this instruction manual for use  
with the product.  
Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger.  
Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger or AC  
adapter.  
Do not disassemble or modify the product.  
Do not expose the product to strong shocks or vibration.  
Do not touch any exposed internal parts.  
- Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power  
outlet using a dry cloth.  
Stop using the product in any case of unusual circumstances such as  
the presence of smoke or a strange smell.  
- Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands.  
Accessories  
- Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the  
power outlet.  
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine or paint thinner  
to clean the product.  
Appendix  
- Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come  
into contact with metallic pins or other metal objects.  
Do not get the product wet. Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into  
the product.  
Index  
- Do not touch the battery charger or AC adapter connected to a  
power outlet during lightning storms.  
Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into the product.  
- Do not place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not damage,  
break or modify the power cord.  
Do not use the product where flammable gases may be present.  
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.  
- Do not wrap the product in cloth or other materials when in use or  
shortly after use when the product is still warm in temperature.  
For products featuring a viewfinder, do not look through the viewfinder  
at strong light sources such as the sun on a bright day or lasers and  
other strong artificial light sources.  
- Do not leave the product connected to a power source for long  
periods of time.  
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.  
This may harm your vision.  
14  
   
Do not allow the product to maintain contact with the same area of skin  
for extended periods of time during use.  
Before Use  
Denotes the possibility of property damage.  
Caution  
This may result in low-temperature contact burns, including skin redness  
and blistering, even if the product does not feel hot. The use of a tripod or  
similar equipment is recommended when using the product in hot places  
and for people with circulation problems or less sensitive skin.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a  
clear day or an intense artificial light source.  
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.  
Camera Basics  
When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be  
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.  
Follow any indications to turn off the product in places where its use is  
forbidden.  
Not doing so may cause other equipment to malfunction due to the effect  
of electromagnetic waves and even result in accidents.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the flash with a  
cotton swab or cloth.  
The heat emitted from the flash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the  
product to malfunction.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Denotes the risk of injury.  
CAUTION  
Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using  
the product.  
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.  
Do not fire the flash near the eyes.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
It may hurt the eyes.  
Strap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any  
product attached on a hook or other object may damage the product.  
Also, do not shake the product or expose the product to strong  
impacts.  
Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with  
tape or other insulators.  
Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions.  
Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do  
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.  
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to  
overheat and distort, resulting in fire.  
Do not apply strong pressure on the lens or allow an object to hit it.  
This may cause injury or damage to the product.  
Accessories  
Flash emits high temperatures when fired. Keep fingers, any other  
part of your body, and objects away from the flash unit while taking  
pictures.  
Appendix  
Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.  
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or  
explosion, resulting in product damage or fire.  
This may cause burns or malfunction of the flash.  
Index  
Do not leave the product in places exposed to extremely high or low  
temperatures.  
The product may become extremely hot/cold and cause burns or injury  
when touched.  
If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that  
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and  
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –  
terminals reversed.  
This may cause the product to malfunction.  
Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket.  
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.  
15  
When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not  
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it  
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.  
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Do not attach any hard objects to the product.  
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
16  
Before Use  
Initial Preparations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Basic Guide  
Prepare for shooting as follows.  
Attaching the Strap  
Camera Basics  
Basic Operations  
Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting  
and playback  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Thread the end of the strap through the  
( )  
2
strap mount (1), and then pull the other  
end of the strap through the loop on the  
threaded end (2).  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
( )  
1
Holding the Camera  
Accessories  
Place the strap around your wrist.  
Appendix  
When shooting, keep your arms close to  
your body and hold the camera securely  
to prevent it from moving. If you have  
raised the flash, do not rest your fingers  
on it.  
Index  
17  
 
Before Use  
Charging the Battery Pack  
For details on charging time and the number of shots and  
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to  
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the  
battery pack charged.  
Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when  
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately  
before) the day of use.  
Camera Basics  
Insert the battery pack.  
1
( )  
1
The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power  
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a  
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an  
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage  
the battery pack.  
After aligning the  
marks on the battery  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
pack and charger, insert the battery pack  
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).  
( )  
2
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Charge the battery pack.  
2
( )  
2
CB-2LH: Flip out the plug (1) and plug the  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card  
charger into a power outlet (2).  
( )  
1
CB-2LHE: Plug the power cord into the  
charger, then plug the other end into a  
power outlet.  
CB-2LH  
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).  
Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted  
in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera  
The charging lamp turns orange, and  
charging begins.  
(
Open the cover.  
When charging is finished, the lamp turns  
1
green.  
( )  
1
Slide the switch (1) and open the cover  
CB-2LHE  
Accessories  
(2).  
Remove the battery pack.  
3
Appendix  
( )  
1
( )  
2
After unplugging the battery charger,  
remove the battery pack by pushing it in  
(1) and up (2).  
Index  
( )  
2
To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not  
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.  
For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach  
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in  
malfunction or damage to the product.  
18  
       
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card  
Remove the battery pack.  
Insert the battery pack.  
2
Before Use  
Holding the battery pack with the terminals  
in the position shown, hold the battery  
lock toward (1) and insert the battery pack  
toward (2) until the lock clicks shut.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Open the cover and press the battery  
lock in the direction of the arrow.  
( )  
1
If you insert the battery pack facing the  
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the  
correct position. Always confirm that the  
battery pack is facing the right way and  
locks when inserted.  
The battery pack will pop up.  
Camera Basics  
( )  
2
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Remove the memory card.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Check your card’s write-protect  
switch and insert the memory card.  
3
Push the memory card in until it clicks,  
and then slowly release it.  
( )  
1
Recording is not possible on memory  
cards with a write-protect switch when the  
switch is in the locked position. Move the  
switch toward (1).  
The memory card will pop up.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Insert the memory card with the label (2)  
facing as shown until it clicks into place.  
Setting the Date and Time  
( )  
2
Make sure the memory card is facing the  
right way when you insert it. Inserting  
memory cards facing the wrong way may  
damage the camera.  
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen  
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this  
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when  
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.  
Accessories  
Close the cover.  
4
Turn the camera on.  
1
Appendix  
Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as  
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the  
closed position (2).  
Press the power button.  
( )  
2
Index  
The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.  
( )  
1
For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be  
19  
       
Changing the Date and Time  
Set the date and time.  
2
Before Use  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an  
Adjust the date and time as follows.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
item.  
Access the menu screen.  
1
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to specify the date and time.  
]
Press the [  
] button.  
When finished, press the [ ] button.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Choose [Date/Time].  
2
Move the zoom lever to choose the [  
]
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
tab.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the  
Specify your home time zone.  
3
[
] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
home time zone.  
Finish the setup process.  
4
Press the [ ] button when finished.  
After a confirmation message, the setting  
screen is no longer displayed.  
Change the date and time.  
3
To turn off the camera, press the power  
button.  
Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and  
Accessories  
Press the [  
] button to close the  
menu screen.  
Appendix  
Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/  
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.  
Specify the correct information.  
Index  
Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the  
camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the  
battery pack is removed.  
The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you  
insert a charged battery pack, even if the camera is left off.  
To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2  
and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning  
the [ ] dial.  
Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will  
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date  
20  
   
Before Use  
Display Language  
Trying the Camera Out  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Change the display language as needed.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Try out the camera by turning it on, shooting some still images or movies,  
and viewing them.  
Enter Playback mode.  
1
Press the [  
] button.  
Camera Basics  
Shooting (Smart Auto)  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Access the setting screen.  
2
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,  
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Press and hold the [ ] button, and then  
immediately press the [  
] button.  
Turn the camera on.  
1
Press the power button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Set the display language.  
3
The startup screen is displayed.  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and  
then press the [ ] button.  
Enter [  
] mode.  
2
Set the mode dial to [  
].  
Once the display language has been set,  
the setting screen is no longer displayed.  
Aim the camera at the subject. The  
camera will make a slight clicking noise  
as it determines the scene.  
Accessories  
Icons representing the scene and image  
stabilization mode are displayed in the  
upper left of the screen.  
Appendix  
Frames displayed around any detected  
Index  
subjects indicate that they are in focus.  
The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after  
pressing the [ ] button before you press the [  
] button.  
In this case, press the [ ] button to dismiss the time display and  
repeat step 2.  
Compose the shot.  
3
To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move  
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),  
and to zoom away from the subject, move  
it toward [ ] (wide angle).  
You can also change the display language by pressing the  
[
] button and choosing [Language  
] on the [ ] tab.  
21  
   
Shoot.  
4
Recording Movies  
1) Start recording.  
Before Use  
Shooting Still Images  
1) Focus.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Press the movie button. The camera  
beeps once as recording begins, and  
Press the shutter button lightly, halfway  
down. The camera beeps twice after  
focusing, and frames are displayed to  
indicate image areas in focus.  
[
Rec] is displayed with the elapsed  
( )  
1
time (1).  
Camera Basics  
Black bars are displayed on the top and  
bottom edges of the screen, and the  
subject is slightly enlarged. The black  
bars indicate image areas not recorded.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Frames displayed around any detected  
faces indicate that they are in focus.  
Once recording begins, take your finger  
off the movie button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
2) Finish recording.  
If [Raise the flash] is displayed, move  
the [ ] switch to raise the flash. It will fire  
when shooting. If you prefer not to use  
the flash, push it down with your finger,  
into the camera.  
Press the movie button again to stop  
recording. The camera beeps twice as  
recording stops.  
2) Shoot.  
Accessories  
Press the shutter button all the way  
down.  
Appendix  
As the camera shoots, a shutter sound  
is played, and in low-light conditions  
when you have raised the flash, it fires  
automatically.  
Index  
Keep the camera still until the shutter  
sound ends.  
After displaying your shot, the camera will  
revert to the shooting screen.  
22  
Play movies.  
3
Before Use  
Viewing  
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the  
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as  
follows.  
[
] dial), and then press the [ ] button  
again.  
Playback now begins, and after the movie  
Enter Playback mode.  
1
Camera Basics  
is finished, [  
] is displayed.  
Press the [  
] button.  
To adjust the volume, press the [ ][  
]
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Your last shot is displayed.  
buttons during playback.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the  
shutter button halfway.  
Choose images.  
2
To view the previous image, press  
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial  
counterclockwise. To view the next  
image, press the [ ] button or turn the  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
[
] dial clockwise.  
Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to  
browse through images quickly.  
Accessories  
To access this screen (Scroll Display  
mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this  
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through  
images.  
Appendix  
Index  
To return to single-image display, press  
the [ ] button.  
Movies are identified by a [  
] icon.  
To play movies, go to step 3.  
23  
   
Erasing Images  
Before Use  
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful  
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Choose an image to erase.  
1
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
Camera Basics  
dial to choose an image.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Erase the image.  
2
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Press the [ ] button.  
After [Erase?] is displayed, press the  
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to  
choose [Erase], and then press the [  
button.  
]
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
The current image is now erased.  
To cancel erasure, press the [ ][  
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose  
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.  
]
You can choose multiple images to erase at once ( 98).  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
24  
 
Before Use  
On/Off  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Shooting Mode  
Press the power button to turn the  
camera on and prepare for shooting.  
Camera Basics  
To turn the camera off, press the power  
Camera Basics  
button again.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Playback Mode  
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your camera, including  
shooting and playback options  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Press the [  
on and view your shots.  
] button to turn the camera  
To turn the camera off, press the [  
]
button again.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [  
button.  
]
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the  
shutter button halfway ( 26).  
The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera  
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is  
retracted by pressing the [  
] button.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
25  
   
Before Use  
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)  
Shutter Button  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates  
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of  
inactivity.  
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter  
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all  
the way down to shoot.  
In this guide, shutter button operations are described as pressing the  
button halfway or all the way down.  
Camera Basics  
Power Saving in Shooting Mode  
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of  
inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera  
turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when  
the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Press halfway. (Press lightly to  
focus.)  
1
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Press the shutter button halfway. The  
camera beeps twice, and frames are  
displayed around image areas in focus.  
(
Power Saving in Playback Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of  
inactivity.  
Press all the way down. (From the  
halfway position, press fully to  
shoot.)  
2
You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of  
Display Off, if you prefer ( 145).  
The camera shoots, as a shutter sound  
is played.  
Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other  
Keep the camera still until the shutter  
sound ends.  
(
Accessories  
Appendix  
Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing  
the shutter button halfway.  
Index  
Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time  
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,  
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject  
moves) before the shutter sound ends.  
26  
     
Before Use  
Shooting Modes  
Shooting Display Options  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.  
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide  
( )  
7
Camera Basics  
( )  
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
( )  
2
Information is displayed  
( )  
6
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
( )  
3
( )  
5
( )  
4
(1) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode  
Fully automatic shooting, with  
camera-determined settings  
(5) Special Scene Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Shoot with settings designed for  
specific scenes, or add a variety of  
(
effects ( 59).  
(2) Creative Shot Mode  
(6) Movie Mode  
No information is displayed  
See several effects applied to  
For shooting movies ( 67).  
You can also shoot movies when  
the mode dial is not set to Movie  
mode, simply by pressing the  
movie button.  
each shot automatically ( 56).  
(3) Self Portrait Mode  
Shoot yourself under optimal  
Accessories  
settings ( 58).  
(7) P, Tv, Av, and M Modes  
Take a variety of shots using  
(4) Sports Mode  
Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view  
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier  
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image  
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that  
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not  
affect recorded images.  
Appendix  
Shoot continuously as the camera  
focuses on moving subjects  
your preferred settings ( 70,  
(
Index  
27  
   
Before Use  
Adjusting the Screen Angle  
Using the FUNC. Menu  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
You can adjust the screen angle and orientation to suit the scene or how  
you are shooting.  
Configure commonly used shooting functions through the FUNC. menu as  
follows.  
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode  
The screen can be opened to about 180°.  
(
Camera Basics  
When including yourself in shots, you  
can view a mirror image of yourself by  
rotating the screen around toward the  
front of the camera.  
Access the FUNC. menu.  
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Press the [ ] button.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Choose a menu item.  
2
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose a menu item (1), and then  
press the [ ] or [ ] button.  
]
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
When the camera is not in use, keep the screen closed.  
Do not force the screen open too far, which may damage the  
camera.  
Available options (2) are listed next to  
menu items, on the right.  
Depending on the menu item, functions  
can be specified simply by pressing the  
( )( )  
1
2
[
] or [ ] button, or another screen is  
To cancel reverse display, choose MENU ( 29) > [ ] tab >  
displayed for configuring the function.  
Accessories  
[Reverse Display] > [Off].  
Choose an option.  
3
Appendix  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose an option.  
Index  
Items labeled with a [  
] icon can be  
configured by pressing the [  
]
button.  
To return to the menu items, press the  
] button.  
[
28  
     
Confirm your choice and exit.  
4
Before Use  
Using the Menu Screen  
Press the [ ] button.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
The screen before you pressed the  
Configure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as  
follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting  
[
] button in step 1 is displayed again,  
showing the option you configured.  
[
], playback [ ], and so on. Note that available menu items vary  
Camera Basics  
To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the  
camera’s default settings ( 149).  
Access the menu screen.  
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Press the [  
] button.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Choose a tab.  
2
Move the zoom lever to choose a tab.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
After you have pressed the [ ][  
]
buttons or turned the [ ] dial to choose a  
tab initially, you can switch between tabs  
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Choose a menu item.  
3
Index  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose a menu item.  
For menu items with options not shown,  
first press the [ ] or [ ] button to switch  
screens, and then either press the [ ][  
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the  
menu item.  
]
To return to the previous screen, press  
the [  
] button.  
29  
   
Choose an option.  
4
Before Use  
On-Screen Keyboard  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an  
option.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID ( 45),  
Confirm your choice and exit.  
5
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.  
Press the [  
screen displayed before you pressed the  
] button in step 1.  
] button to return to the  
Camera Basics  
Entering Characters  
( )  
1
[
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose a key labeled  
with a character, and then press the [  
button repeatedly to enter the character  
you want.  
]
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the  
The amount of information you can enter  
(1) varies depending on the function you  
are using.  
camera’s default settings ( 149).  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Moving the Cursor  
Choose [ ] or [ ] and press the [  
button.  
]
Entering Line Breaks  
Accessories  
Choose [ ] and press the [ ] button.  
Appendix  
Switching Input Modes  
To switch to other kinds of characters  
Index  
(such as numbers or symbols) on this  
screen, choose [ ] and press the [  
button.  
]
To enter uppercase letters, choose [  
]
and press the [ ] button.  
Available input modes vary depending on  
the function you are using.  
30  
   
Deleting Characters  
Before Use  
Indicator Display  
Choose [  
The previous character will be deleted.  
] and press the [ ] button.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
The indicator on the back of the camera ( 4) lights up or blinks  
depending on the camera status.  
Choosing [  
] and holding down the  
[
] button will delete five characters at  
Indicator  
a time.  
Color  
Camera Status  
Camera Basics  
Status  
Blinking  
On  
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting  
images, shooting long exposures ( 84,  
Returning to the Previous Screen  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Press the [  
] button.  
Green  
(
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
or display off ( 26,  
Orange  
Charging via a compact power adapter  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
When the indicator blinks green, do not turn the camera off, open  
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or hit the camera, which  
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
31  
 
Before Use  
Clock  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
You can check the current time.  
Press and hold the [ ] button.  
The current time appears.  
Camera Basics  
If you hold the camera vertically while  
using the clock function, it will switch to  
vertical display. Press the [ ][ ] buttons  
or turn the [ ] dial to change the display  
color.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Press the [ ] button again to cancel the  
clock display.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
When the camera is off, press and hold the [ ] button, then  
press the power button to display the clock.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
32  
 
Before Use  
Shooting with Camera-Determined  
Settings  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,  
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Shooting (Smart Auto)  
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting  
Still Images  
Movies  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Turn the camera on.  
1
Press the power button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
The startup screen is displayed.  
Enter [  
] mode.  
2
Set the mode dial to [  
].  
Aim the camera at the subject. The  
camera will make a slight clicking noise  
as it determines the scene.  
Accessories  
Icons representing the scene and image  
stabilization mode are displayed in  
Appendix  
the upper left of the screen ( 37,  
Index  
Frames displayed around any detected  
subjects indicate that they are in focus.  
33  
     
Compose the shot.  
3
2) Shoot.  
Before Use  
To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move  
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),  
and to zoom away from the subject, move  
it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom  
bar (1) showing the zoom position is  
displayed, along with the range of focus  
(2).)  
Press the shutter button all the way down.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
As the camera shoots, a shutter sound  
is played, and in low-light conditions  
when you have raised the flash, it fires  
automatically.  
( )  
1
Camera Basics  
Keep the camera still until the shutter  
sound ends.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
To zoom in or out quickly, move the zoom  
lever all the way toward [ ] (telephoto)  
or [ ] (wide angle), and to zoom in  
or out slowly, move it just a little in the  
desired direction.  
After displaying your shot, the camera will  
revert to the shooting screen.  
( )  
2
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Recording Movies  
1) Start recording.  
Press the movie button. The camera  
beeps once as recording begins, and  
Shoot.  
4
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Shooting Still Images  
1) Focus.  
[
Rec] is displayed with the elapsed  
( )  
1
time (1).  
Black bars are displayed on the top and  
bottom edges of the screen, and the  
subject is slightly enlarged. The black  
bars indicate image areas not recorded.  
Press the shutter button halfway. The  
camera beeps twice after focusing, and  
frames are displayed to indicate image  
areas in focus.  
Frames displayed around any detected  
faces indicate that they are in focus.  
Several frames are displayed when  
multiple areas are in focus.  
Accessories  
Once recording begins, take your finger  
off the movie button.  
Appendix  
2) Resize the subject and recompose  
the shot as needed.  
Index  
To resize the subject, repeat the  
operations in step 3.  
However, note that the sound of camera  
operations will be recorded. Note that  
movies shot at zoom factors shown in  
blue will look grainy.  
If [Raise the flash] is displayed, move  
the [ ] switch to raise the flash. It will fire  
when shooting. If you prefer not to use  
the flash, push it down with your finger,  
into the camera.  
When you recompose shots, the  
focus, brightness, and colors will be  
automatically adjusted.  
34  
 
Shoot.  
3) Finish recording.  
3
Before Use  
Press the movie button again to stop  
recording. The camera beeps twice as  
recording stops.  
Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
(
The camera records both a still image  
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with  
the still image and a shutter sound, forms  
a single chapter in the digest movie.  
Recording will stop automatically when  
the memory card becomes full.  
Camera Basics  
The flash firing during shots indicates that the camera has  
automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main  
subject and background (Multi-area White Balance).  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [  
digest movies are recorded for each shot.  
A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image  
] mode, because  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [  
operating the camera in other ways.  
] mode, or  
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode  
Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded  
in digest movies.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Still Images  
Movies  
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The  
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are  
later combined in a digest movie.  
Digest movie quality is [  
] and cannot be changed.  
Clips recorded in this mode may be included in Story Highlights albums  
Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway  
(
or trigger the self-timer ( 143).  
Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following  
Enter [ ] mode.  
1
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [  
] mode.  
Accessories  
- The digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the  
total recording time reaches approximately 16 minutes and 40  
seconds.  
Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”  
(
Appendix  
- The digest movie is protected ( 96).  
Index  
- Daylight saving time ( 19) or time zone ( 144) settings  
Compose the shot.  
2
are changed.  
- A new folder is created ( 148).  
Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart  
Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased.  
focus.  
If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust  
the setting in advance. Choose MENU ( 29) > [ ] tab >  
For more impressive digest movies,  
aim the camera at subjects about four  
seconds before shooting still images.  
[Digest Type] > [No Stills].  
Individual chapters can be edited ( 107).  
35  
   
Digest Movie Playback  
Before Use  
You can change how long images are displayed after shots  
(
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play ( 90).  
Movies  
Still Images/Movies  
Camera Basics  
Keep your fingers away from the microphone (1) while recording  
movies. Blocking the microphone may prevent audio from being  
recorded or may cause the recording to sound muffled.  
If the camera makes no operating sounds, it may have been  
turned on while holding down the [ ] button. To activate  
] button, choose [Mute] on the [  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
sounds, press the [  
]
tab, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Disable].  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
( )  
1
Still Images  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when  
recording movies, because sounds made by the camera will be  
recorded.  
A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be  
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a  
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.  
Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes  
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant  
camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before  
If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the  
The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once  
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the  
Accessories  
To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit  
when shooting in low-light conditions.  
Appendix  
A blinking [ ] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot  
indicates that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished  
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready,  
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or  
release it and press it again.  
Audio is recorded in stereo.  
Index  
The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and  
Babies (Sleeping) icons ( 37) are displayed.  
Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen  
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,  
brightness, and colors used.  
36  
   
In [ ] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,  
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.  
Before Use  
Scene Icons  
For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:  
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;  
moving children; and other moving subjects.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
In [ ] and [  
] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera  
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are  
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.  
Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving  
children in drive modes other than [ ] ( 38,  
[Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to [On] and scenes are automatically corrected  
Camera Basics  
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot ( 38).  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
(
Background  
Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people  
when the flash is set to [ ].  
Subject  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Normal Backlit Dark*1 Sunsets Spotlights  
Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving  
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of  
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years  
2
3
2
3
2
3
3
2
3
2
3
3
People  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
3
Moving People  
Shadows on Face  
Smiling  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
are correct ( 19).  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Sleeping  
Try shooting in [ ] mode ( 70) if the scene icon does not  
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot  
with your expected effect, color, or brightness.  
Babies  
Smiling Babies  
Sleeping Babies  
Moving Children  
Other Subjects  
Other Moving Subjects  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Other Close-Range  
Subjects  
2
3
*
*
Index  
*1 Tripod used.  
*2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,  
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.  
*3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,  
and gray for all other backgrounds.  
The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue,  
and the background color of [ ] is orange.  
For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range  
Subjects icons are displayed.  
37  
   
Continuous Shooting Scenes  
Before Use  
Image Stabilization Icons  
If the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is  
displayed when you shoot a still image, the camera shoots continuously. If  
the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is displayed  
when you press the shutter button halfway, one of the icons [ ], [ ], or  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions (Intelligent IS) is  
automatically applied, and the following icons are displayed.  
[
] is displayed to inform you that the camera shoots continuously.  
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)  
Camera Basics  
Smiling  
(including Babies)  
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera  
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save  
the image determined to be the best.  
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*  
Image stabilization for angular camera shake and shift-shake in  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
macro shots (Hybrid IS). For movies, [  
image stabilization is also applied.  
] is displayed and [  
]
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by  
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera  
shake and image noise.  
The AF-assist beam and the flash will not fire, and  
the shutter sound will not be played.  
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as  
when recording while walking (Dynamic)  
Sleeping  
(including Babies)  
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when  
recording movies at telephoto (Powered)  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on  
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie  
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to  
counteract wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).  
So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children  
who move around, the camera will capture three  
consecutive images for each shot.  
Children  
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you  
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical  
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow  
subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera  
shake.  
In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images  
may not look as expected.  
Accessories  
Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first  
shot.  
Appendix  
To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] ( 83). In  
this case, an IS icon is not displayed.  
Index  
[
] is not available in [  
] mode.  
When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ] button,  
choose [ ] in the menu, and then select [  
].  
38  
     
Before Use  
On-Screen Frames  
Common, Convenient Features  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
In [  
] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera  
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)  
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.  
A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)  
Camera Basics  
Still Images  
Movies  
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are  
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects  
within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera  
detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the  
screen.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,  
use digital zoom for up to about 160x enlargement.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Move the zoom lever toward [ ].  
1
Hold the lever until zooming stops.  
When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera  
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus  
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).  
Zooming stops at the largest zoom factor  
before the image becomes noticeably  
grainy, which is then indicated on the  
screen.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Try shooting in [ ] mode ( 70) if no frames are displayed, if  
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are  
displayed on the background or similar areas.  
( )  
1
Move the zoom lever toward [  
again.  
]
2
The camera zooms in even closer on the  
subject.  
(1) is the current zoom factor.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates  
the zoom position). The zoom bar is color-coded to indicate the  
zoom range.  
Index  
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not  
appear grainy.  
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not  
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).  
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear  
grainy.  
Because the blue range will not be available at some recording  
achieved by following step 1.  
39  
   
Before Use  
To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU ( 29) > [ ] tab >  
If you prefer to shoot at the zoom factor of the screen in step 1,  
press the shutter button all the way down.  
[Digital Zoom] > [Off].  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
You can adjust the zoom factor that the camera reverts to when  
you release the [ ] button by moving the zoom lever to resize  
the white frame while you hold the [ ] button.  
Easily Reacquiring Subjects after Manual  
Zooming (Framing Assist – Seek)  
To adjust the area displayed when the [ ] button is pressed,  
Camera Basics  
access MENU ( 29) > [ ] tab > [  
Display Area], and  
choose one of the three options.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [ ] button after  
you press the shutter button all the way down in self-timer mode  
Still Images  
Movies  
If you lose track of a subject while zoomed in, you can find it more easily  
by temporarily zooming out.  
(
43).  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Look for the lost subject.  
1
Auto Zooming in Response to Subject Movement  
(Auto Zoom)  
Press and hold the [ ] button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
The camera zooms out and displays  
a white frame around the area shown  
before you pressed the [ ] button.  
Still Images  
Movies  
The camera automatically zooms in and out to keep a detected face  
(
automatically zooms out, and vice versa. This size can also be adjusted,  
as needed.  
Accessories  
Enter [ ] Auto mode.  
1
Press and release the [ ] button quickly.  
Appendix  
Reacquire the subject.  
2
[ ] is displayed.  
Aim the camera so that the subject enters  
A white frame is displayed around the  
detected face, and the camera zooms  
in and out to keep the subject on the  
screen.  
Index  
the white frame, and then release the  
[
] button.  
The previous magnification is now  
restored, so that the area within the white  
frame fills the screen again.  
When multiple faces are detected, a  
white frame is displayed around the main  
subject’s face and up to two gray frames  
around other faces, as the camera zooms  
to keep these subjects on the screen.  
Some shooting information is not displayed while the camera is  
zoomed out.  
During movie shooting, the white frame is not displayed if you  
press the [ ] button. Also note that a changed zoom factor and  
camera operating sounds are recorded.  
40  
     
Adjusting the Constant Face Display Size  
Shoot.  
2
Before Use  
Auto zooming continues even after you  
shoot, and the frames are still displayed.  
When  
Auto is on, press the [ ][  
]
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
buttons to choose the desired option.  
To cancel auto zooming, press the [  
button again. [ Auto: Off] is displayed.  
]
The camera zooms automatically to keep  
faces at the specified size.  
Camera Basics  
A face may not be displayed at a constant size relative to the  
screen at some zoom factors, or if the person’s head is tilted or  
facing the camera indirectly.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Auto zoom to prevent subjects from moving off the  
screen.  
When multiple faces are detected, the camera zooms  
to keep these subjects on the screen.  
During movie recording, a changed zoom factor and camera  
operating sounds are recorded.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Auto  
When  
Auto is on, some shooting information is not displayed,  
and some shooting settings cannot be configured.  
Auto zooming to keep multiple subjects on the screen is not  
performed during movie recording, even if faces are detected.  
Auto zooming is not performed during continuous shooting.  
Keep faces large enough to show facial expressions  
clearly.  
Face  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Keep faces small enough to show the person’s upper  
body.  
Upper Body  
Whole Body  
Keep faces small enough to show the person’s entire  
body.  
If multiple faces are detected in step 1, you can switch the main  
face used for auto zooming by pressing the [ ] button.  
When a detected subject moves toward the edge of the screen,  
the camera zooms out to keep the subject on the screen.  
The zoom factor cannot be changed after you press the shutter  
Keep faces at the size specified by moving the zoom  
lever. Release the zoom lever once the desired size  
has been obtained.  
Manual  
Accessories  
button all the way down in self-timer mode ( 43).  
The camera prioritizes zooming to keep subjects on the screen.  
For this reason, it may not be possible to maintain a constant  
face display size, depending on subject movement and shooting  
conditions.  
The face size can also be adjusted in MENU ( 29) > [  
]
Appendix  
tab > [ Auto Settings] > [ Auto Zoom]. You can choose [Off]  
to deactivate this feature and use only the feature described in  
Index  
When no face is detected, the camera zooms to a certain level  
and stops zooming until a face is detected.  
You can zoom in or out with the zoom lever when [Face], [Upper  
Body], or [Whole Body] is selected, but the original zoom factor  
will be restored in a few seconds after you release the lever.  
You can clear your specified face size during movie recording by  
pressing the [ ] button.  
Face sizes cannot be changed during movie recording.  
41  
 
Before Use  
Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming  
(Seek Assist)  
The camera does not zoom out automatically while [ ] is  
displayed around a detected face, even if you move the camera.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
displayed around a detected face, and the camera automatically  
zooms out when moved.  
Zooming is not possible while the shutter button is pressed  
halfway.  
To deactivate this feature and use only the feature described in  
If you lose track of a subject while zoomed in and move the camera to  
look for it, the camera detects this movement and automatically zooms  
out, which makes it easier to find the subject.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Enter [ ] Auto mode (=40).  
1
Auto  
Settings] > [Seek Assist] > [Off].  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Look for the lost subject.  
2
When you move the camera to look for  
the subject, the camera zooms out to  
help you find it.  
Adding a Date Stamp  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Reacquire the subject.  
Still Images  
Movies  
3
Once you find the subject and stop  
moving the camera, the camera zooms  
in again.  
The camera can add the shooting date to images, in the lower-right  
corner.  
However, note that date stamps cannot be edited or removed, so confirm  
beforehand that the date and time are correct ( 19).  
Configure the setting.  
1
Accessories  
Press the [  
] button, choose [Date  
Stamp ] on the [ ] tab, and then press  
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Date &  
Appendix  
Time] or [Date] ( 29).  
Index  
Shoot.  
4
To cancel this mode, press the [  
]
button again. [ Auto: Off] is displayed.  
42  
     
Before Use  
Using the Self-Timer  
Shoot.  
2
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
As you take shots, the camera adds the  
shooting date or time to the lower-right  
corner of images.  
Still Images  
Movies  
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other  
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the  
shutter button.  
To restore the original setting, choose  
[Off] in step 1.  
Camera Basics  
Configure the setting.  
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the  
Date stamps cannot be edited or removed.  
menu, and then choose [ ].  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Once the setting is complete, [ ] is  
displayed.  
Shots taken without adding a date stamp can be printed with one  
as follows.  
However, adding a date stamp this way to images that already  
have one may cause it to be printed twice.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
- Print using printer functions ( 158)  
- Use camera DPOF print settings ( 161) to print  
- Use the software downloaded from the Canon website  
(
Shoot.  
2
For Still Images: Press the shutter button  
halfway to focus on the subject, and then  
press it all the way down.  
Accessories  
For Movies: Press the movie button.  
Appendix  
Once you start the self-timer, the lamp  
will blink and the camera will play a self-  
timer sound.  
Index  
Two seconds before the shot, the blinking  
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will  
remain lit in case the flash fires.)  
To cancel shooting after you have  
triggered the self-timer, press the  
[
] button.  
To restore the original setting, choose [  
]
in step 1.  
43  
   
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake  
Still Images  
Before Use  
For movies recorded using the self-timer, recording begins after  
your specified delay time, but specifying the number of shots has  
no effect.  
Movies  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you  
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are  
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.  
Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”  
When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and color tone  
are determined by the first shot. More time is required between  
shots when the flash fires or when you have specified to take  
many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the memory  
card becomes full.  
Camera Basics  
(
Once the setting is complete, [ ] is  
displayed.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds  
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed  
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.)  
(
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Customizing the Self-Timer  
Still Images  
Movies  
Continuous Shooting  
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).  
Still Images  
] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot  
continuously.  
Movies  
Choose [ ].  
1
In [  
Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”  
(
[
43), choose [ ] and press the  
] button.  
Accessories  
Configure the setting.  
1
Configure the setting.  
2
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the  
Appendix  
menu, and then choose [ ] ( 28).  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the  
delay time or number of shots.  
Once the setting is complete, [ ] is  
Index  
displayed.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose a value, and then press the  
] button.  
]
[
Once the setting is complete, [ ] is  
displayed.  
Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”  
(
Shoot.  
2
Hold the shutter button all the way down  
to shoot continuously.  
44  
       
Before Use  
During continuous shooting, the focus, exposure, and colors are  
locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the  
shutter button halfway.  
Using Face ID  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s  
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when  
Cannot be used with the self-timer ( 43).  
Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow  
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the  
zoom position.  
shooting. In [  
] mode, the camera can detect babies and children  
based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when  
shooting.  
This function is also useful when searching for a specific registered  
person among a large number of images ( 91).  
Registering people in advance also makes it easier to add them when  
Camera Basics  
As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.  
Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Multi-area White Balance ( 33) is not available. Similarly, [Hg  
Lamp Corr.] ( 51) is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
creating Story Highlights albums ( 108).  
Image Display during Playback  
Personal Information  
Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group,  
and only the first image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with  
Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved  
on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected,  
their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID  
function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others,  
and when posting images online where many others can view them.  
the image is part of a group, [  
screen.  
] is displayed in the upper left of the  
If you erase a grouped image ( 98), all images in the group  
are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.  
When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after  
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,  
Accessories  
names, and birthdays) from the camera ( 49).  
Grouped images can be played back individually ( 92) and  
ungrouped ( 92).  
Appendix  
the group.  
Index  
Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back  
case, images are temporarily ungrouped.  
The following actions are not available for grouped images:  
editing Face ID information ( 93), magnifying ( 94),  
tagging as favorites ( 101), editing ( 102), printing  
(
adding to a photobook ( 163). To do these things, either  
view grouped images individually ( 92) or cancel grouping  
(
45  
   
Before Use  
After [Register?] is displayed, press  
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial  
to choose [OK], and then press the [  
button.  
Registering Face ID Information  
]
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
You can register information (face info, names, and birthdays) for up to 12  
people to use with Face ID.  
The [Edit Profile] screen is displayed.  
Access the setting screen.  
1
Camera Basics  
Press the [  
] button, choose [Face  
ID Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Register the person’s name and  
birthday.  
3
press the [ ] button ( 29).  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Press the [ ] button to access the  
keyboard, and then enter the name  
(
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose [Add to Registry], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
To register a birthday, on the [Edit Profile]  
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press  
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),  
and then press the [ ] button.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Add a New Face], and  
then press the [ ] button.  
]
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an  
option.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
Accessories  
dial to specify the date.  
When finished, press the [ ] button.  
Appendix  
Save the settings.  
4
Index  
Register face information.  
2
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose [Save], and then press the  
] button.  
After a message is displayed, press the  
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to  
Aim the camera so that the face of the  
person you want to register is inside the  
gray frame at the center of the screen.  
[
[
A white frame on the person’s face  
indicates that the face is recognized.  
Make sure a white frame is displayed on  
the face, and then shoot.  
choose [Yes], and then press the [  
button.  
]
If the face is not recognized, you cannot  
register face information.  
46  
   
Continue registering face  
information.  
5
Before Use  
People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected  
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
To register up to 4 more points of face  
information (expressions or angles),  
repeat step 2.  
Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured  
image or scene differs drastically from the registered face  
information.  
Registered faces are more easily  
recognized if you add a variety of face  
information. In addition to a head-on  
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot  
when smiling, and shots inside and  
outside.  
Camera Basics  
If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected,  
overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering  
face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of  
registered faces.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you  
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the  
The flash will not fire when following step 2.  
If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons  
image during playback ( 93).  
(
] mode.  
Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
grow, you should update their face info regularly ( 46).  
If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose  
[Face ID Settings] on the [ ] tab, choose [Face ID], and then  
choose [Off].  
You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if  
you have not filled all 5 face info slots ( 46).  
You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen  
(simple information display) ( 88).  
In [ ] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen,  
but they will be recorded in still images.  
Shooting  
Accessories  
Names recorded in continuous shooting ( 44,  
continue to be recorded in the same position as the first shot,  
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that  
person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for  
that person when shooting.  
even if subjects move.  
Appendix  
Index  
When you point the camera toward people,  
the names of up to 3 registered people will  
be displayed when they are detected.  
Checking and Editing Registered Information  
Shoot.  
Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.  
1
Displayed names will be recorded in still  
images. The names of detected people  
(maximum total of 5) will be recorded,  
even if the names are not displayed.  
Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID  
Information” ( 46), choose [Check/  
Edit Info] and press the [ ] button.  
47  
   
Overwriting and Adding Face Information  
Choose a person to check or edit  
their information.  
2
Before Use  
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should  
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as  
their faces change quickly as they grow.  
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been  
filled.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose the person whose  
information you want to check or edit, and  
then press the [ ] button.  
Camera Basics  
Access the [Add Face Info] screen.  
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID  
Check or edit the information as  
needed.  
3
Information” ( 46), choose [Add Face  
Info] and press the [ ] button.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
To check a name or birthday, choose [Edit  
Profile] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons  
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the  
[
] button. On the screen displayed,  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Choose a person to overwrite their  
face info.  
2
you can edit the name or birthday as  
described in step 3 of “Registering Face  
ID Information” ( 46).  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose the name of the  
person whose face info you want to  
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.  
To check face information, choose [Face  
Info List] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons  
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the  
[
] button. To erase face information,  
If five items of face info have already  
been registered, a message will be  
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the  
press the [ ] button on the screen  
displayed, choose face information to  
Accessories  
erase by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][  
]
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and  
Appendix  
buttons or turning the [ ] dial, and then  
press the [ ] button. After [Erase?] is  
displayed, choose [OK] (either press the  
then press the [ ] button.  
If less than five items of face info are  
registered, go to step 4 to add face  
information.  
Index  
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and  
then press the [ ] button.  
Choose the face info to overwrite.  
3
Even if you change names in [Edit Profile], the names recorded in  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose the face info to  
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.  
previously shot images will remain the same.  
48  
   
Erasing Registered Information  
Register face information.  
4
Before Use  
Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID  
You can erase information (face info, names, and birthdays) registered to  
Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be  
erased.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Information” ( 46) to shoot, and then  
register the new face information.  
Registered faces are more easily  
recognized if you add a variety of face  
information. In addition to a head-on  
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot  
when smiling, and shots inside and  
outside.  
Access the [Erase Info] screen.  
1
Camera Basics  
Follow step 1 in “Registering Face ID  
Information” ( 46) and choose [Erase  
Info].  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filled.  
Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.  
Choose a person to erase their  
information.  
You can follow the above steps to register new face info when  
there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite  
any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, first erase  
2
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose the name of the  
person to erase, and then press the [  
button.  
unwanted existing info ( 47), and then register new face  
information ( 46) as needed.  
]
After [Erase?] is displayed, press the  
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to  
choose [OK], and then press the [  
button.  
]
Accessories  
If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to  
Appendix  
search for images that include them ( 91).  
Index  
You can also erase names in image information ( 93).  
49  
   
Before Use  
Changing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image  
Size)  
Image Customization Features  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Changing the Aspect Ratio  
Choose the image’s number of recording pixels from 4 levels, as follows.  
For guidelines on how many shots at each recording pixel setting can fit  
Camera Basics  
Still Images  
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.  
Movies  
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the  
menu, and choose the desired option  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the  
menu, and choose the desired option  
(
28).  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
(
The option you configured is now  
displayed.  
Once the setting is complete, the screen  
aspect ratio will be updated.  
To restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [ ].  
To restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [ ].  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Guidelines for Choosing Recording Pixel Setting  
Based on Paper Size (for 4:3 Images)  
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.  
Accessories  
Same aspect ratio as 35mm film, used for printing images at 5 x  
7-inch or postcard sizes.  
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)  
Appendix  
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Used for display on  
standard-definition televisions or similar display devices. Also used  
for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series sizes.  
A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)  
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard  
For e-mailing and similar purposes  
Index  
Square aspect ratio.  
Not available in [  
] mode.  
Not available in [  
] mode.  
50  
     
Before Use  
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury  
Lamps  
Changing Movie Image Quality  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still Images  
Movies  
Three image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the total  
recording time for movies at each level of image quality that will fit on a  
In [  
] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes  
Press the [ ] button, choose [  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This  
greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi-  
area White Balance.  
Camera Basics  
] in  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
(
Press the [  
] button, choose [Hg  
The option you configured is now  
displayed.  
Lamp Corr.] on the [ ] tab, and then  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
choose [On] ( 29).  
To restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [  
Once the setting is complete, [ ] is  
displayed.  
].  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
To restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [Off].  
Image  
Quality  
Number of  
Recording Pixels  
Frame Rate  
Details  
Accessories  
After you are finished shooting under mercury lamps, you should  
set [Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not  
caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.  
1920 x 1080  
30 fps  
For shooting in Full HD.  
For shooting in HD.  
Appendix  
1280 x 720  
640 x 480  
30 fps  
30 fps  
Index  
For shooting in standard  
definition.  
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the  
desired results.  
In continuous shooting ( 44), this setting is set to [Off] and  
cannot be changed.  
In [  
] and [  
] modes, black bars displayed on the  
top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not  
recorded.  
In [ ] mode, [  
] is also available, offering smoother motion  
(
51  
     
Before Use  
Deactivating Auto Level  
Helpful Shooting Features  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Auto leveling keeps movies straight. To cancel this feature, choose  
[Disable].  
Displaying Grid Lines  
Camera Basics  
Press the [  
] button, choose  
Still Images  
Movies  
[
Auto level] on the [ ] tab, and then  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Grid lines can be displayed on the screen for vertical and horizontal  
reference while shooting.  
choose [Disable] ( 29).  
Press the [  
Lines] on the [ ] tab, and then choose  
] button, choose [Grid  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
[On] ( 29).  
Once the setting is complete, grid lines  
are displayed on the screen.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Once recording begins, the display area narrows, and subjects  
To restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [Off].  
are enlarged ( 53).  
Accessories  
Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.  
Appendix  
Index  
52  
     
Before Use  
Changing the IS Mode Settings  
Deactivating Image Stabilization  
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size  
Shown before Shooting  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still Images  
Movies  
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes  
and subjects are enlarged to allow for image straightening and correction  
of significant camera shake.  
To record movies with subjects at the same size shown before shooting,  
you can reduce image stabilization and cancel Auto level.  
Camera Basics  
When the camera is held still (as when shooting from a tripod), you should  
set image stabilization to [Off] to deactivate it.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Access the setting screen.  
1
Set [ Auto level] to [Disable] as  
Press the [  
] button, choose [IS  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press  
the [ ] button ( 29).  
Configure the setting.  
2
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Settings] screen.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the  
] dial to choose [IS Mode], and then  
[
Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose  
choose [Off] by pressing the [ ][  
buttons.  
]
[Low] ( 29).  
You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded  
at the same size shown before shooting.  
[Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off]  
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is  
(
Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is set to  
].  
Continuous  
Off  
Accessories  
automatically applied (Intelligent IS) ( 38).  
Deactivates image stabilization.  
[
Appendix  
Index  
53  
       
Before Use  
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from  
Lighting Up  
Customizing Camera Operation  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as  
follows.  
Still Images  
Movies  
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce  
red-eye when the flash is used in low-light shots.  
Camera Basics  
Access the [Flash settings] screen.  
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing  
Press the [  
] button, choose [Flash  
settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press  
Still Images  
Movies  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
the [ ] button ( 29).  
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus  
when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.  
Configure the setting.  
2
Press the [  
] button, choose [AF-  
assist Beam] on the [ ] tab, and then  
choose [Off] ( 29).  
Choose [Off] ( 29).  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
To restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [On].  
To restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [On].  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
54  
     
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots  
Before Use  
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots  
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],  
[4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] (=55).  
1
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is  
displayed immediately after shooting.  
Configure the setting.  
Camera Basics  
2
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Access the [Review image after  
shooting] screen.  
[
] dial to choose [Display Info]. Press  
1
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired  
option.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Press the [  
] button, choose  
To restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [Off].  
[Review image after shooting] on the  
[
(
] tab, and then press the [ ] button  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Configure the setting.  
2
Choose [Display Time] and press the  
][ ] buttons to choose the desired  
[
option.  
Off  
Displays only the image.  
To restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [Quick].  
Detailed  
Displays shooting details ( 171).  
Accessories  
When [Display Time] ( 55) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display  
Info] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.  
Appendix  
By pressing the [ ] button while an image is displayed after  
shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the  
settings of [Display Info] are not changed. You can also erase  
Index  
images by pressing the [ ] button, or protect ( 96) or tag  
Quick  
Displays images only until you can shoot again.  
images as favorites ( 101) by pressing the [ ] button.  
2 sec.,  
4 sec.,  
8 sec.  
Displays images for the specified time. Even while the  
shot is displayed, you can take another shot by pressing  
the shutter button halfway again.  
Displays images until you press the shutter button  
halfway.  
Hold  
Off  
No image display after shots.  
55  
     
Before Use  
Applying Effects Automatically  
(Creative Shot)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Camera Basics  
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot  
Other Shooting Modes  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically  
applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the  
subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture  
multiple still images with effects using camera-determined settings.  
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with  
unique image effects or captured using special functions  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Enter [ ] mode.  
1
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Set the mode dial to [  
].  
Shoot.  
2
Press the shutter button all the way  
down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is  
played three times.  
After the six images are displayed  
in succession, they are displayed  
simultaneously for about two seconds.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
To keep the images displayed until you  
press the shutter button halfway, press  
the [ ] button. You can choose an image  
for full-screen display by pressing the  
Index  
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the [  
dial, and then press the [ ] button.  
To return to the original display, press the  
] button.  
]
[
56  
       
Before Use  
Recording Movies with a Variety of Effects  
Shooting will take some time when the flash fires, but hold the  
camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
The six images are managed together as a group ( 92).  
Let the camera determine subjects and shooting conditions when you  
record movies, and filters and effects such as playback in slow or fast  
motion will be added automatically. Once you have recorded a few  
movies, up to four are automatically combined to create a Creative Shot  
movie of 15 – 25 seconds. Note that sound is not recorded in this mode.  
Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only  
available immediately after you shoot.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Choosing Effects  
Enter [ ] mode.  
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].  
You can choose effects for images captured in [  
] mode.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
After choosing [  
button.  
] mode, press the [  
]
Record the first movie.  
2
Press the movie button. Recording  
begins, and a bar is displayed to indicate  
the elapsed time.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose the effect, and then press  
the [ ] button.  
]
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Recording stops automatically in 3 – 6  
seconds.  
Record the second to fourth movies.  
3
All effects  
Auto  
Repeat step 2 three times to record four  
movies.  
Images resemble old photos  
Retro  
Images are generated in one color  
Bold, distinctive-looking images  
Subdued, natural-looking images  
Monochrome  
Special  
Natural  
Accessories  
Even if you do not record four movies that day, a Creative Shot  
movie will be saved as a separate file once the date changes.  
Appendix  
Index  
Effects are generally applied consistently to movies 1 – 4, but you  
can also change the effect in each movie ( 57).  
Individual chapters can be edited ( 107).  
Creative Shot Movie Playback  
You can choose and play back Creative Shot movies recorded in [  
]
mode ( 89).  
57  
       
Before Use  
Shoot.  
4
Shooting Yourself under Optimal  
Settings (Self Portrait)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Hold the camera steady as you shoot.  
When you press the shutter button all the  
way down with background defocus set  
to [Auto], the camera shoots twice and  
processes the images.  
Still Images  
Movies  
For self-portraits, customizable image processing includes skin smoothing  
as well as brightness and background adjustment to make yourself stand  
out.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Smooth skin  
effect  
Choose from three levels of skin smoothing. Skin  
smoothing is optimized for the main subject’s face.  
Enter [ ] mode.  
1
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Set the mode dial to [  
].  
Brightness  
Choose from five levels of brightness.  
Background  
Defocus  
Defocus the background.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Configure the setting.  
2
Areas other than people’s skin may be modified, depending on  
the shooting conditions.  
Press the [ ] button to access the setting  
screen for smooth skin and brightness.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a  
setting item, and then press the [ ][  
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to adjust the  
value as you watch the screen.  
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the  
desired results.  
]
Background defocus can also be  
In [ ] flash mode, background defocusing is set to [Off] and  
cannot be changed.  
Accessories  
disabled. After you choose [  
press the [ ] button.  
] in step 1,  
The time left before shooting is shown on the top of the screen  
when you activate the self-timer by selecting [ ], or by selecting  
Appendix  
Open the screen.  
3
[
] and setting the time to 3 seconds or more.  
Index  
Open the screen as shown.  
58  
   
Before Use  
Moving Subjects (Sports)  
Specific Scenes  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will  
automatically configure the settings for optimal shots.  
Shoot continuously as the camera focuses on moving subjects.  
Enter [  
] mode.  
1
Enter [ ] mode.  
1
Camera Basics  
Set the mode dial to [  
].  
Set the mode dial to [ ].  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Choose a shooting mode.  
2
Focus.  
2
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the  
menu, and then choose a shooting mode  
While you are pressing the shutter button  
halfway, the camera will continue to  
adjust focus and image brightness where  
the blue frame is displayed.  
(
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Shoot.  
3
Shoot.  
3
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)  
Still Images  
Hold the shutter button all the way down  
to shoot continuously.  
Movies  
Take shots of people with a softening  
effect.  
Accessories  
In [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed  
(
Appendix  
For details on the shooting range in [ ] mode, see “Lens”  
Shooting Evening Scenes without  
Using a Tripod (Handheld Night  
Scene)  
Index  
There may be a delay after continuous shooting before you can  
shoot again. Note that some types of memory cards may delay  
your next shot even longer.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions,  
camera settings, and the zoom position.  
Continuous shooting is not available in [ ] Auto mode ( 40).  
Beautiful shots of evening scenes or  
portraits with evening scenery in the  
background, without the need to hold the  
camera very still (as with a tripod).  
A single image is created by combining  
consecutive shots, reducing camera  
shake and image noise.  
59  
     
Shooting under Low Light (Low  
Light)  
Before Use  
Applying Special Effects  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.  
Shoot with minimal camera and subject  
shake even in low-light conditions.  
Choose a shooting mode.  
1
Camera Basics  
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
(
Auto Mode /  
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Still Images  
Movies  
Shoot.  
2
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Vivid shots of fireworks.  
Shooting in Vivid Colors (Super  
Vivid)  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Still Images  
Movies  
Shots in rich, vivid colors.  
Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.  
In [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed  
(
Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it  
steady while shooting.  
In [ ] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions  
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.  
In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other  
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,  
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other  
Posterized Shots (Poster Effect)  
Accessories  
Still Images  
Movies  
Shots that resemble an old poster or  
Appendix  
illustration.  
means to secure the camera ( 83).  
Index  
When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [  
]
In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots first, to make  
mode instead of [ ] mode will give better results ( 33).  
] mode recording pixel setting is [ ] (2592 x 1944) and  
cannot be changed.  
sure you obtain the desired results.  
[
In [ ] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press  
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.  
60  
   
Before Use  
Shooting with a Skin Smoothing Effect (Smooth  
Skin)  
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye  
Effect)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still Images  
Movies  
Processes images to make skin look smoother.  
Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens.  
Camera Basics  
Choose [ ].  
Choose [ ].  
1
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
(
(
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Choose an effect level.  
Choose an effect level.  
2
2
Press the [ ] button, choose an effect  
level (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or  
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [  
button.  
Press the [ ] button, choose an effect  
level (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or  
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [  
button.  
]
]
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
A preview is shown of how your shot will  
look with the effect applied.  
A preview is shown of how your shot will  
look with the effect applied.  
Shoot.  
3
Shoot.  
3
Areas other than people’s skin may be modified, depending on  
the shooting conditions.  
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the  
Accessories  
desired results.  
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the  
desired results.  
Appendix  
Index  
61  
     
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for  
One-Minute Clips)  
Before Use  
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature  
Effect)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Speed  
Playback Time  
Approx. 12 sec.  
Approx. 6 sec.  
Approx. 3 sec.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above  
and below your selected area.  
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by  
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and  
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is  
not recorded.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Movies are played back at 30 fps.  
The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set  
the zoom before shooting.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Choose [ ].  
1
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the  
desired results.  
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
(
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
A white frame is displayed, indicating the  
image area that will not be blurred.  
To switch the orientation of the frame (from horizontal to vertical  
or vice-versa), press the [ ][ ] buttons in step 2. You can move  
the frame in vertical orientation by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.  
Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the  
frame.  
Choose the area to keep in focus.  
2
Press the [ ] button.  
Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,  
and press the [ ][ ] buttons to move it.  
Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [  
] and [ ] at  
an aspect ratio of [  
be changed.  
] ( 50). These quality settings cannot  
Accessories  
The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [ ] button on the  
screens in steps 2 and 3, or while shooting movies.  
Appendix  
For movies, choose the movie  
playback speed.  
3
Index  
Press the [  
] button, and then  
choose the speed by pressing the [ ][  
buttons or turning the [ ] dial.  
]
Return to the shooting screen and  
shoot.  
4
Press the [  
] button to return to the  
shooting screen, and then shoot.  
62  
     
Before Use  
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera  
Effect)  
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still Images  
Movies  
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter were  
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.  
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting  
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.  
Camera Basics  
Choose [ ].  
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Choose [ ].  
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
1
(
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
(
].  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Choose an effect level.  
2
Choose a color tone.  
Press the [ ] button, choose an effect  
level (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or  
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [  
button.  
2
Press the [ ] button, choose a color tone  
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the  
]
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
[
] dial), and then press the [ ] button.  
A preview is shown of how your shot will  
look with the effect applied.  
A preview is shown of how your shot will  
look with the effect applied.  
Shoot.  
Shoot.  
3
3
Standard  
Warm  
Shots resemble toy camera images.  
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the  
desired results.  
Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].  
Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].  
Accessories  
Cool  
Appendix  
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the  
Index  
desired results.  
63  
     
Before Use  
Shooting in Monochrome  
Special Modes for Other Purposes  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.  
Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart  
Shutter)  
Choose [ ].  
1
Camera Basics  
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
Still Images  
Movies  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
(
Choose a color tone.  
2
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection (Smile)  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Press the [ ] button, choose a color tone  
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the  
Still Images  
Movies  
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you  
pressing the shutter button.  
[
] dial), and then press the [ ] button.  
A preview is shown of how your shot will  
look with the effect applied.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Choose [ ].  
1
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
Shoot.  
3
(
59) and choose [ ], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
B/W  
Black and white shots.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [ ], and then press the  
]
Sepia  
Blue  
Sepia tone shots.  
Blue and white shots.  
[
] button.  
Accessories  
The camera now enters shooting standby  
mode, and [Smile Detection on] is  
displayed.  
Appendix  
Aim the camera at a person.  
Index  
2
Each time the camera detects a smile, it  
will shoot after the lamp lights up.  
To pause smile detection, press the  
[
] button. Press the [ ] button again to  
resume detection.  
64  
   
Press the shutter button all the way  
down.  
3
Before Use  
Switch to another mode when you finish shooting, or the camera  
will continue shooting each time a smile is detected.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
The camera now enters shooting standby  
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is  
displayed.  
You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.  
The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face  
the camera and open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are  
visible.  
The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound  
is played.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Face the camera and wink.  
4
To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons after  
choosing [ ] in step 1.  
The camera will shoot about two seconds  
after detecting a wink by the person  
whose face is inside the frame.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Automatic shooting is not available while you are holding down  
the [ ] button.  
To cancel shooting after you have  
triggered the self-timer, press the  
Auto Shooting after Wink Detection (Wink Self-Timer)  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
[
] button.  
Still Images  
Movies  
If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.  
Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat,  
or glasses.  
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way  
down. The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.  
Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as  
a wink.  
Choose [ ].  
1
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
59) and choose [ ], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds  
later.  
(
Accessories  
To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons after  
choosing [ ] in step 1.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [ ], and then press the  
]
Appendix  
If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is  
pressed all the way down, the camera will shoot after a person  
enters the shooting area and winks.  
[
] button.  
Index  
The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [ ] button after you  
press the shutter button all the way down.  
Compose the shot and press the  
shutter button halfway.  
2
Make sure a green frame is displayed  
around the face of the person who will  
wink.  
65  
 
Auto Shooting after Detecting New Person (Face Self-  
Timer)  
Join the subjects in the shooting  
area and look at the camera.  
4
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
After the camera detects a new face, the  
lamp blinking and self-timer sound will  
speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp  
will remain lit.) About two seconds later,  
the camera will shoot.  
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of  
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area  
(
77). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar  
Camera Basics  
shots.  
To cancel shooting after you have  
triggered the self-timer, press the  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Choose [ ].  
1
[
] button.  
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
59) and choose [ ], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
(
Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the  
shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.  
To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons after  
choosing [ ] in step 1.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [ ], and then press the  
]
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
[
] button.  
The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [ ] button after you  
press the shutter button all the way down.  
Compose the shot and press the  
shutter button halfway.  
2
Make sure a green frame is displayed  
around the face you focus on and white  
frames around other faces.  
Press the shutter button all the way  
down.  
3
Accessories  
Appendix  
The camera now enters shooting standby  
mode, and [Look straight at camera to  
start count down] is displayed.  
Index  
The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound  
is played.  
66  
   
Shooting Movies with Smoother Motion  
Before Use  
Recording Various Movies  
Shoot movies with smoother motion, at nearly double the frame rate, as  
follows.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Movies  
].  
[
Recording Movies in Standard Mode  
Camera Basics  
Still Images  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Enter [ ] mode.  
1
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Set the mode dial to [ ].  
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the  
menu, and then choose [ ] ( 28).  
Locking or Changing Image Brightness  
Still Images  
Movies  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Black bars are displayed on the top and  
bottom edges of the screen, and the  
subject is slightly enlarged. The black  
bars indicate image areas not recorded.  
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in 1/3-  
stop increments within a range of -2 to +2 stops.  
Lock the exposure.  
1
Configure the settings to suit the  
movie (=172).  
2
Press the [ ] button to lock the  
exposure. The exposure shift bar is  
displayed.  
Shoot.  
3
To unlock the exposure, press the [  
button again.  
]
Accessories  
Press the movie button.  
Appendix  
To stop movie recording, press the movie  
button again.  
Index  
Adjust the exposure.  
2
Turn the [ ] dial to adjust the exposure,  
as you watch the screen.  
Shoot (=67).  
3
67  
       
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter  
Before Use  
[Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off]  
Still Images  
Movies  
(
Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is set to  
].  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Auto slow shutter can be disabled if movement in movies is rough.  
However, under low light, movies may look dark.  
[
Press the [  
] button, choose [  
Auto slow shutter] on the [ ] tab, and  
Camera Basics  
then choose [Disable] ( 29).  
Sound Settings  
To restore the original setting, repeat this  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
process but choose [Enable].  
Still Images  
Movies  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Deactivating the Wind Filter  
Noise caused by strong wind can be reduced. However, the recording  
may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind. In  
this case, you can deactivate the wind filter.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Press the [  
Filter] on the [ ] tab, and then choose  
] button, choose [Wind  
[Off] ( 29).  
Auto slow shutter is only available for [  
] movies.  
Accessories  
Correcting Severe Camera Shake  
Using the Attenuator  
Still Images  
Movies  
Appendix  
The attenuator can reduce audio distortion in noisy environments.  
However, in quiet environments, it lowers the sound-recording level.  
Counteract severe camera shake, such as when recording while moving.  
The portion of images displayed changes more than for [Standard], and  
subjects are further enlarged.  
Index  
Press the [  
] button, choose  
[Attenuator] on the [ ] tab, and then  
Follow the steps in “Recording Movies  
with Subjects at the Same Size Shown  
choose the desired option ( 29).  
before Shooting” ( 53) to choose  
[High].  
68  
       
Playback Effects  
Before Use  
Recording Movies in Short Clip Mode  
Playback in fast motion  
2x  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Playback at normal speed  
Playback in slow motion  
1x  
Apply playback effects to brief clips of a few seconds, such as fast motion,  
slow motion, or replay. Clips recorded in this mode may be included in  
1/2x  
Normal playback with the last two seconds rewound and  
played again in slow motion  
Story Highlights albums ( 108).  
Camera Basics  
Enter [ ] mode.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].  
Sound is not recorded in these clips.  
The movie quality is [  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the  
menu, and then choose [ ] ( 28).  
Black bars displayed on the top and  
bottom edges of the screen indicate  
image areas not recorded.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Specify the shooting time and  
playback effect.  
2
Press the [ ] button.  
Turn the [ ] dial to set the shooting time  
(4 – 6 sec.), and press the [ ][ ] buttons  
to set the playback effect.  
Accessories  
Shoot (=67).  
3
Appendix  
A bar showing the elapsed time is  
displayed.  
Index  
69  
   
Before Use  
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting  
style.  
Camera Basics  
Enter [ ] mode.  
1
P Mode  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Set the mode dial to [ ].  
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style  
Customize the settings as desired  
2
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
If the optimum exposure cannot be obtained when you press the  
shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are  
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed  
Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set  
(
which may enable optimum exposure.  
Movies can be recorded in [ ] mode as well, by pressing the  
to [ ] mode.  
[ ]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure  
movie button. However, some FUNC. ( 28) and MENU  
Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than  
(
[
], make sure the function is available in that mode ( 172).  
Accessories  
recording.  
Appendix  
Index  
70  
   
Compose the shot and shoot.  
2
Before Use  
Image Brightness (Exposure)  
After one shot, AE is unlocked and [ ] is  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
no longer displayed.  
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure  
Compensation)  
AE: Auto Exposure  
After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination  
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [ ] dial  
(Program Shift).  
Camera Basics  
Still Images  
Movies  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop  
increments, in a range of -2 to +2.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Changing the Metering Method  
Press the [ ] button. As you watch  
the screen, turn the [ ] dial to adjust  
brightness, and then press the [ ] button  
again when finished.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting  
conditions as follows.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
The correction level you specified is now  
displayed.  
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the  
menu, and choose the desired option  
(
28).  
The option you configured is now  
displayed.  
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)  
Still Images  
Movies  
Accessories  
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and  
exposure separately.  
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit  
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the  
shooting conditions.  
Appendix  
Evaluative  
Lock the exposure.  
1
Index  
Center  
Weighted  
Avg.  
Determines the average brightness of light across  
the entire image area, calculated by treating  
brightness in the central area as more important.  
Aim the camera at the subject to shoot  
with the exposure locked. With the  
shutter button pressed halfway, press the  
[
] button.  
Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE  
Point frame), displayed in the center of the screen.  
Spot  
[ ] is displayed, and the exposure is  
locked.  
To unlock AE, release the shutter button  
and press the [ ] button again. In this  
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.  
71  
         
Before Use  
Changing the ISO Speed  
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still Images  
Movies  
Set the ISO speed to [AUTO] for automatic adjustment to suit the shooting  
mode and conditions. Otherwise, set a higher ISO speed for higher  
sensitivity, or a lower value for lower sensitivity.  
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or  
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal  
brightness. Insufficient overall image contrast can also be automatically  
corrected before shooting to make subjects stand out better.  
Camera Basics  
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
menu, and choose the desired option  
Press the [  
[i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab, and then  
choose [Auto] ( 29).  
] button, choose  
(
The option you configured is now  
displayed.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Once the setting is complete, [ ] is  
displayed.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have  
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.  
Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image  
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera  
shake in some shooting conditions.  
Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or  
may cause images to appear grainy.  
Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which  
may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the flash  
range. However, shots may look grainy.  
You can also correct existing images ( 104).  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
72  
     
Custom White Balance  
Before Use  
Image Colors  
Still Images  
Movies  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white  
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white  
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.  
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)  
Camera Basics  
Still Images  
Movies  
choose [ ].  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more  
natural for the scene you are shooting.  
Aim the camera at a plain white subject,  
so that the entire screen is white. Press  
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the  
menu, and choose the desired option  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
the [  
] button.  
The tint of the screen changes once the  
white balance data has been recorded.  
(
28).  
The option you configured is now  
displayed.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after  
recording white balance data.  
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for  
the shooting conditions.  
Auto  
Day Light  
Cloudy  
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.  
For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.  
Accessories  
For shooting under ordinary incandescent  
lighting.  
Tungsten  
Appendix  
Fluorescent  
For shooting under white fluorescent lighting.  
Fluorescent H For shooting under daylight fluorescent lighting.  
Index  
For manually setting a custom white balance  
Custom  
(
73  
     
Before Use  
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)  
White balance ( 73) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes.  
With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone  
may change. These settings may not produce the expected  
results with some skin tones.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia  
or black and white.  
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the  
menu, and choose the desired option  
Camera Basics  
Custom Color  
Still Images  
Movies  
(
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,  
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.  
The option you configured is now  
displayed.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Access the setting screen.  
1
My Colors Off  
Vivid  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation,  
making images sharper.  
choose [ ], and then press the [  
button.  
]
Tones down contrast and color saturation for  
subdued images.  
Neutral  
Configure the setting.  
2
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose  
an item, and then specify the value by  
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the  
] dial.  
Sepia  
B/W  
Creates sepia tone images.  
Creates black and white images.  
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid  
Green, and Vivid Red to produce intense yet  
natural-looking colors resembling images on  
positive film.  
[
Accessories  
Positive Film  
For stronger/more intense effects (or  
darker skin tones), adjust the value to  
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects  
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to  
the left.  
Appendix  
Lighter Skin Tone  
Darker Skin Tone  
Lightens skin tones.  
Darkens skin tones.  
Index  
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky,  
ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid.  
Press the [  
the setting.  
] button to complete  
Vivid Blue  
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes  
mountains, foliage, and other green subjects  
more vivid.  
Vivid Green  
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red  
subjects more vivid.  
Vivid Red  
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and  
Custom Color  
other qualities as desired ( 74).  
74  
     
Before Use  
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode  
Shooting Range and Focusing  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can  
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button  
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near  
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)  
Camera Basics  
Still Images  
Movies  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For  
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either  
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
Choose [ ].  
1
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Press the [ ] button, choose [  
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial), and then press the [ ] button.  
] (either  
]
]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.  
Once the setting is complete, [ ] is  
displayed.  
[  
] and the MF indicator are displayed.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Specify the general focal position.  
2
If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.  
Referring to the on-screen MF indicator  
(1, which shows the distance and focal  
position) and the magnified display, press  
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial  
to specify the general focal position, and  
then press the [ ] button.  
In the yellow bar display area below the zoom bar, [ ] will turn  
gray and the camera will not focus.  
Accessories  
To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod  
( )  
1
To adjust the magnification, press the [  
button.  
]
and shooting with the camera set to [ ] ( 44).  
Appendix  
Index  
Fine-tune the focus.  
3
Press the shutter button halfway to have  
the camera fine-tune the focal position  
(Safety MF).  
75  
     
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)  
Before Use  
When you focus manually, the AF frame mode ( 77) is  
Still Images  
Movies  
[Center] and AF frame size ( 77) is [Normal], and these  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
settings cannot be changed.  
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing  
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge  
detection as needed.  
Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom ( 39) or  
appear.  
Access the setting screen.  
Camera Basics  
1
Press the [  
] button, choose [MF  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Peaking Settings] on the [ ] tab, and  
To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to  
stabilize it.  
then choose [On] ( 29).  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
You can enlarge or hide the magnified display area by adjusting  
MENU ( 29) > [ ] tab > [MF-Point Zoom] settings.  
To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button  
Configure the setting.  
is pressed halfway, choose MENU ( 29) > [ ] tab > [Safety  
2
MF] > [Off].  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Choose a menu item to configure, and  
then choose the desired option ( 29).  
Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
76  
   
Center  
Before Use  
Digital Tele-Converter  
Still Images  
Movies  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
One AF frame is displayed in the center. Effective for reliable focusing.  
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or  
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster  
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the  
same zoom factor.  
A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot  
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Press the [  
[Digital Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then  
choose the desired option ( 29).  
] button, choose  
To reduce the AF frame size, press the [  
] button and set  
[AF Frame Size] on the [ ] tab to [Small] ( 29).  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
The AF frame size is set to [Normal] when you use the digital  
The view is enlarged and the zoom factor  
is displayed on the screen.  
focus mode ( 75).  
To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or  
in a corner, first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF  
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you  
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot  
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down  
(Focus Lock).  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom  
lever all the way toward [  
] for maximum telephoto, and when  
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step  
2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” ( 39).  
Face AiAF  
Changing the AF Frame Mode  
Still Images  
Movies  
Accessories  
Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative  
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).  
Still Images  
Movies  
Appendix  
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as  
follows.  
After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed  
around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main  
subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other  
detected faces.  
Index  
Press the [  
] button, choose [AF  
Frame] on the [ ] tab, and then choose  
the desired option ( 29).  
When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving  
subjects, within a certain range.  
After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are  
displayed around faces in focus.  
77  
         
Before Use  
When the subject is detected, the camera  
beeps and [ ] is displayed. Even if the  
subject moves, the camera will continue  
to track the subject within a certain range.  
If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed  
(without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in  
the areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
If faces are not detected when Servo AF ( 79) is set to  
If no subject is detected, [ ] is displayed.  
[Enable], the AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen  
when you press the shutter button halfway.  
To cancel tracking, press the [ ] button  
again.  
Camera Basics  
Examples of faces that cannot be detected:  
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close  
- Subjects that are dark or light  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Shoot.  
3
- Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden  
The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.  
No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you  
press the shutter button halfway.  
Press the shutter button halfway. [  
]
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
changes to a blue [ ], which follows  
the subject as the camera continues to  
adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF)  
(
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Press the shutter button all the way down  
to shoot.  
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)  
Still Images  
Movies  
Even after your shot, [ ] is still displayed  
and the camera continues to track the  
subject.  
Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.  
Choose [Tracking AF].  
1
Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or  
move too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches  
that of the background too closely.  
[Tracking AF].  
Accessories  
[ ] is displayed in the center of the  
screen.  
[
] is not available.  
Appendix  
Choose a subject to focus on.  
2
Index  
Aim the camera so that [ ] is on the  
desired subject, and then press the [  
button.  
The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter  
button halfway without pressing the [ ] button. After your shot,  
]
[
] is displayed in the center of the screen.  
When shooting in [  
]
button for at least one second.  
If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not be displayed when  
registered people are detected, but the names will be recorded  
in the still images ( 45). However, when you choose a  
registered person as the subject, their name is displayed.  
78  
   
Shooting with Servo AF  
Before Use  
Changing the Focus Setting  
Still Images  
Movies  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the  
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long  
as you press the shutter button halfway.  
Still Images  
Movies  
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on  
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.  
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the  
shutter button halfway.  
Configure the setting.  
Camera Basics  
1
Press the [  
] button, choose [Servo  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Press the [  
] button, choose  
AF] on the [ ] tab, and then choose  
[Continuous AF] on the [ ] tab, and then  
[Enable] ( 29).  
choose [Disable] ( 29).  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Focus.  
2
The focus and exposure are maintained  
where the blue AF frame is displayed  
while you are pressing the shutter button  
halfway.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because  
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press  
the shutter button halfway.  
Enable  
Disable  
Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.  
In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames  
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.  
In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the  
specified AF frame mode.  
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not  
focus constantly.  
If optimum exposure cannot be obtained, the shutter speed and  
aperture value are displayed in orange. Release the shutter  
button, and then press it halfway again.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
AF lock shooting is not available.  
Not available when using the self-timer ( 43).  
Index  
79  
     
Before Use  
Shooting with the AF Lock  
Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the  
Subject in Focus  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still Images  
Movies  
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will  
not change even when you release your finger from the shutter button.  
Shoot continuously as the camera keeps the subject in focus. For details  
Camera Basics  
Lock the focus.  
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Configure the setting.  
With the shutter button pressed halfway,  
press the [ ] button.  
1
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the  
menu, and then choose [ ] ( 28).  
The focus is now locked, and [  
the MF indicator are displayed.  
] and  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Once the setting is complete, [ ] is  
To unlock the focus, after you release the  
shutter button, press the [ ] button again  
displayed.  
and choose [ ] (either press the [ ][  
buttons or turn the [ ] dial).  
]
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Shoot.  
2
Hold the shutter button all the way down  
to shoot continuously.  
Compose the shot and shoot.  
2
The images are managed together as a  
group ( 92).  
Accessories  
AF is locked ( 80), [ ] is changed to [ ].  
Cannot be used with the self-timer ( 43).  
Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow  
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the  
zoom position.  
Appendix  
Index  
As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.  
Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.  
Continuous shooting is not available in [ ] Auto mode ( 40),  
even if you choose [ ].  
80  
     
Slow Synchro  
Before Use  
Flash  
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a  
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other  
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,  
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other  
Changing the Flash Mode  
Camera Basics  
Still Images  
Movies  
means to secure the camera ( 83).  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details  
In [ ] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main  
subject does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Raise the flash.  
1
Move the [ ] switch.  
Off  
For shooting without the flash.  
Configure the setting.  
2
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Press the [ ] button, choose a flash  
mode (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or  
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [  
button.  
If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter  
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,  
mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it  
still.  
]
The option you configured is now  
displayed.  
Accessories  
The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button  
when the flash is lowered. Move the [ ] switch to raise the flash,  
then configure the setting.  
Appendix  
Index  
Auto  
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.  
On  
Fires for each shot.  
81  
   
Before Use  
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation  
Shooting with the FE Lock  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still Images  
Movies  
Just as with regular exposure compensation ( 71), you can adjust the  
flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.  
shots.  
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the  
menu, and adjust the setting by either  
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning  
Camera Basics  
Raise the flash and set it to [ ]  
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
the [ ] dial ( 28).  
Lock the flash exposure.  
2
The correction level you specified is now  
displayed.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Aim the camera at the subject to shoot  
with the exposure locked. With the  
shutter button pressed halfway, press the  
[
] button.  
The flash fires, and when  
] is displayed, the flash output level is  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically  
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value for flash shots to  
reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.  
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter  
[
retained.  
To unlock FE, release the shutter button  
and press the [ ] button again. In this  
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.  
speed and aperture value by accessing MENU ( 29) and  
choosing [ ] tab > [Flash settings] > [Safety FE] > [Off].  
You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by  
accessing MENU ( 29) and choosing [ ] tab > [Flash  
Compose the shot and shoot.  
3
settings] > [Flash Exp. Comp].  
Accessories  
You can also access the [Flash settings] MENU screen ( 29)  
After one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is  
no longer displayed.  
when the flash is up by pressing the [ ] button and immediately  
Appendix  
pressing the [  
] button.  
FE: Flash Exposure  
Index  
82  
     
Before Use  
If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the  
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this  
case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].  
Other Settings  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording.  
Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality)  
Camera Basics  
Still Images  
Movies  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as  
follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can  
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the  
menu, and choose the desired option  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
(
28).  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Changing the IS Mode Settings  
Still Images  
You can keep image stabilization off until the moment you shoot.  
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Deactivating Image  
Movies  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Stabilization” ( 53) and choose  
[Shoot Only].  
Index  
83  
     
Before Use  
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera  
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.  
Camera Basics  
Enter [ ] mode.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Set the mode dial to [  
].  
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for  
your shooting style  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Set the shutter speed.  
2
Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter speed.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a  
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes  
images to reduce noise.  
Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective  
mode.  
When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set  
[IS Mode] to [Off] ( 83).  
Accessories  
Maximum shutter speed with the flash is 1/2000 second. If you  
specify a faster speed, the camera will automatically reset the  
speed to 1/2000 second before shooting.  
Appendix  
With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is [80]  
and cannot be changed.  
Orange display of the aperture value when you press the shutter  
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been  
obtained. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is  
Index  
displayed in white, or use safety shift ( 85).  
[
]: Time value  
84  
     
Before Use  
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)  
Specific Shutter Speeds and  
Aperture Values ([M] Mode)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera  
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed  
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.  
Camera Basics  
Enter [  
] mode.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1
Set the mode dial to [  
].  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Enter [ ] mode.  
1
Set the aperture value.  
2
Set the mode dial to [ ].  
Turn the [ ] dial to set the aperture  
value.  
Configure the setting.  
2
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Press the [ ] button to choose shutter  
speed (1) or aperture value (2), and turn  
the [ ] dial to specify a value.  
An exposure level mark (4) based on  
your specified values is shown on the  
exposure level indicator for comparison to  
the optimum exposure (3).  
Orange display of the shutter speed when you press the shutter  
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been  
obtained. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is  
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).  
( ) ( )  
1
2
( )  
3
The exposure level mark is shown in  
orange when the difference from optimum  
exposure exceeds 2 stops.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
( )  
4
[
]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the  
diaphragm in the lens)  
In [ ] and [ ] modes, press the [  
Index  
] button and  
set [Safety shift] on the [ ] tab to [On] ( 29) to have the  
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed and aperture value  
when there are exposure problems, so that you can shoot at the  
optimum exposure.  
However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires.  
85  
     
Before Use  
Adjusting the Flash Output  
After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure  
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.  
Screen brightness may change depending on your specified  
shutter speed and aperture value. However, screen brightness  
remains the same when the flash is up and the mode is set to [ ].  
To have the setting that is not chosen in step 2 (whether shutter  
speed or aperture value) automatically adjusted to obtain  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Choose from the three flash levels in [ ] mode.  
Enter [ ] mode.  
1
Camera Basics  
Set the mode dial to [ ].  
optimum exposure, hold the shutter button halfway and press the  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
[
] button. Note that optimum exposure may not be possible with  
Configure the setting.  
2
some settings.  
With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is [80]  
and cannot be changed.  
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the  
menu, and adjust the setting by either  
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
[
] Auto mode is not available in [ ] mode.  
the [ ] dial ( 28).  
Once the setting is complete, the flash  
output level is displayed.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
[
]: Manual  
[
]: Minimum, [  
]: Medium, [  
]:  
Calculation of optimum exposure is based on the specified  
Maximum  
metering method ( 71).  
You can also set the flash level by accessing MENU ( 29)  
and choosing [ ] tab > [Flash settings] > [Flash Output].  
You can also set the flash level in [  
] or [  
] mode by  
accessing MENU ( 29) and choosing [ ] tab > [Flash  
settings] > [Flash Mode] > [Manual].  
Accessories  
You can also access the [Flash settings] MENU screen ( 29)  
Appendix  
when the flash is up by pressing the [ ] button and immediately  
pressing the [  
] button.  
Index  
86  
   
Before Use  
Viewing  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as  
follows.  
Camera Basics  
Enter Playback mode.  
1
Playback Mode  
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Press the [  
] button.  
Your last shot is displayed.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [  
enter Playback mode.  
] button to  
Choose images.  
2
To view the previous image, press  
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial  
counterclockwise. To view the next  
image, press the [ ] button or turn the  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were  
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other  
cameras.  
[
] dial clockwise.  
Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to  
browse through images quickly.  
Accessories  
To access this screen (Scroll Display  
mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this  
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through  
images.  
Appendix  
Index  
To return to single-image display, press  
the [ ] button.  
To browse images grouped by shooting  
date, press the [ ][ ] buttons in Scroll  
Display mode.  
87  
       
Before Use  
Movies are identified by a [  
To play movies, go to step 3.  
] icon.  
Switching Display Modes  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide  
Camera Basics  
Play movies.  
3
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
To start playback, press the [ ] button,  
choose [ ] (either press the [ ][  
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then  
press the [ ] button again.  
]
No Information Display  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Adjust the volume.  
4
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the  
volume.  
Simple Information Display  
Detailed Information Display  
GPS Information Display  
To adjust the volume when the volume  
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press  
the [ ][ ] buttons.  
( )  
1
Pause playback.  
5
Accessories  
To pause or resume playback, press the  
] button.  
[
Appendix  
After the movie is finished, [  
displayed.  
] is  
Index  
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the  
shutter button halfway.  
To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU ( 29) > [  
] tab  
> [Scroll Display] > [Off].  
To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback  
] tab > [Resume] > [Last shot].  
To change the transition shown between images, access MENU  
(
] tab >  
[Transition Effect].  
88  
   
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Viewing Short Movies Recorded in Creative Shot  
Mode (Creative Shot Movies)  
Movies  
Movies  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed  
information display ( 88).  
Still Images  
Movies  
Histogram  
Play back Creative Shot movies recorded in [  
] mode ( 56).  
Camera Basics  
Still Images  
Choose a movie.  
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
The graph in detailed information display  
Press the [  
] button and choose  
(
[Play Creative Shot Movies] on the [  
]
distribution of brightness in the image.  
The horizontal axis represents the degree  
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how  
much of the image is at each level of  
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a  
way to check exposure.  
tab ( 29).  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Play the movie.  
2
Select a movie and press the [ ] button  
to play it.  
GPS Information Display  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still images and movies you shoot can be  
geotagged using GPS information (such  
as latitude, longitude, and elevation)  
from a Bluetooth enabled smartphone  
Accessories  
(
136). You can review this information  
in the GPS information display.  
Appendix  
Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC  
(shooting date and time) are listed from  
top to bottom.  
Index  
GPS information display is not available for images that lack this  
information.  
[---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available  
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.  
UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as  
Greenwich Mean Time  
89  
         
Viewing by Date  
Before Use  
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting  
Still Images (Digest Movies)  
Digest movies can be viewed by date.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Choose a movie.  
1
Still Images  
Movies  
Press the [  
Play Digest Movies] on the [  
] button, choose [List/  
] tab, and  
View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode ( 35) on a  
day of still image shooting as follows.  
Camera Basics  
then choose a date ( 29).  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Choose an image.  
1
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
Play the movie.  
dial to choose a still image labeled with  
].  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
2
[
Press the [ ] button to start playback.  
Checking People Detected in Face ID  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Play the digest movie.  
2
Still Images  
Movies  
Press the [ ] button, and then choose  
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode ( 88),  
the names of up to five detected people registered in Face ID ( 45)  
will be displayed.  
[
] in the menu ( 28).  
The digest movie recorded automatically  
on the day of still image shooting is  
played back from the beginning.  
Press the [ ] button several times until  
simple information display is activated,  
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose an image.  
Accessories  
After a moment, [  
] will no longer be displayed when  
Appendix  
you are using the camera with information display deactivated  
Names will be displayed on detected  
(
people.  
Index  
If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using  
Face ID, choose MENU ( 29) > [  
] tab > [Face ID Info] >  
[Name Display] > [Off].  
90  
       
Before Use  
Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions  
Browsing and Filtering Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering  
image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect  
Navigating through Images in an Index  
(
Camera Basics  
Still Images  
Movies  
Name  
Displays images of a registered person ( 46).  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images  
Displays images with detected faces.  
People  
you are looking for.  
Displays the images shot on a specific date.  
Shot Date  
Favorites  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Display images in an index.  
1
Displays images tagged as favorites ( 101).  
Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to  
display images in an index. Moving the  
lever again will increase the number of  
images shown.  
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in  
Still image/Movie  
[
] mode ( 35).  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Choose a search condition.  
1
To display fewer images, move the zoom  
lever toward [ ]. Fewer images are  
shown each time you move the lever.  
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the  
menu, and choose a condition ( 28).  
When you have selected [ ], [ ], or  
Choose an image.  
2
[
], choose the condition by pressing  
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the screen  
displayed, and then press the [ ] button.  
Turn the [ ] dial to scroll through the  
images.  
Accessories  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose  
View the filtered images.  
2
an image.  
Appendix  
Images matching your conditions are  
displayed in yellow frames. To view only  
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons, or  
turn the [ ] dial.  
An orange frame is displayed around the  
selected image.  
Index  
Press the [ ] button to view the selected  
image in single-image display.  
To cancel filtered display, choose [ ] in  
step 1.  
To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the  
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial rapidly), choose MENU  
When the camera has found no corresponding images for some  
conditions, those conditions will not be available.  
(
] tab > [Index Effect] > [Off].  
91  
       
View images in the group  
individually.  
3
Before Use  
To show or hide information, press the [ ] button in step 2.  
Options for viewing the images found (in step 2) include  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the  
] dial will display only images in the  
[
group.  
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing  
To cancel group playback, press the [  
]
Camera Basics  
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and  
press the [ ] button again ( 28).  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
If you edit images and save them as new images ( 102 –  
During group playback (step 3), you can browse through images  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
found are no longer shown.  
actions to all images in the group at once by choosing [Protect All  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Viewing Individual Images in a Group  
Still Images  
Movies  
80) and images shot in  
Images shot continuously ( 44,  
To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still  
[
images, choose MENU ( 29) > [  
] tab > [Group Images]  
However, you can also view the images individually.  
> [Off]. However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped during  
individual playback.  
Choose a grouped image.  
1
Simultaneous display in [  
] mode as described in step 2 of  
“Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot” ( 56) is only  
shown immediately after you shoot.  
Accessories  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose an image labeled with  
].  
]
Appendix  
[
Index  
Choose [ ].  
2
Press the [ ] button, and then choose  
[
] in the menu ( 28).  
92  
   
Choose the editing option.  
3
Before Use  
Editing Face ID Information  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose [Overwrite], and  
then press the [ ] button.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it  
or erase it.  
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face  
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been  
erased.  
Camera Basics  
Choose the name of the person to  
overwrite with.  
4
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Changing Names  
Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Face Information” ( 48) to choose  
the name of the person you want to  
overwrite with.  
Access the setting screen.  
1
Press the [  
] button and choose  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
[Face ID Info] on the [  
] tab ( 29).  
Erasing Names  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
]
On the screen displayed in step 3 in  
“Changing Names” ( 93), choose  
[Erase] and press the [ ] button.  
Choose an image.  
2
After [Erase?] is displayed, press the  
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to  
choose [OK], and then press the [  
button.  
]
Accessories  
choose an image and press the [  
button.  
]
Appendix  
An orange frame is displayed around the  
selected face. When multiple names are  
Index  
displayed in an image, press the [ ][  
]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the  
name to change, and then press the [  
button.  
]
93  
       
Before Use  
Viewing Slideshows  
Image Viewing Options  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows. Each  
image is displayed for about three seconds.  
Magnifying Images  
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the  
menu, and choose the desired option  
Camera Basics  
Still Images  
Movies  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
(
Magnify an image.  
1
The slideshow will start after [Loading  
image] is displayed for a few seconds.  
Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will  
zoom in and magnify the image. You  
can magnify images up to about 10x by  
continuing to hold the zoom lever.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Press the [  
slideshow.  
] button to stop the  
The approximate position of the displayed  
area (1) is shown for reference.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
The camera’s power-saving functions ( 26) are deactivated  
during slideshows.  
To zoom out, move the zoom lever  
toward [ ]. You can return to single-  
image display by continuing to hold it.  
To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.  
You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the  
( )  
1
[
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fast-  
rewind, hold the [ ][ ] buttons down.  
Move the display position and  
switch images as needed.  
2
In filtered display ( 91), only images matching search  
Accessories  
To move the display position, press the  
conditions are played.  
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.  
Appendix  
To switch to other images while zoomed,  
turn the [ ] dial.  
Index  
You can return to single-image display from magnified display by  
pressing the [ ] button.  
94  
     
Changing Slideshow Settings  
Before Use  
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shuffle)  
You can set up slideshows to repeat, and you can change the transitions  
between images and the display duration of each image.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may  
wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera  
offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in  
an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in  
many kinds of scenes.  
Access the setting screen.  
1
Press the [  
] button, and then  
Camera Basics  
choose [Slideshow] on the [ ] tab  
(
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Configure the setting.  
2
Choose Smart Shuffle.  
1
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Choose a menu item to configure, and  
then choose the desired option ( 29).  
Press the [ ] button, and then choose  
[
] in the menu ( 28).  
To start the slideshow with your settings,  
choose [Start] and press the [ ] button.  
Four candidate images are displayed.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
To return to the menu screen, press the  
[
] button.  
Choose an image.  
2
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose  
the image you want to view next.  
Your chosen image is displayed in the  
center, surrounded by the next four  
candidate images.  
Accessories  
For full-screen display of the center  
image, press the [ ] button. To restore  
the original display, press the [ ] button  
again.  
Appendix  
Index  
Press the [  
] button to restore  
single-image display.  
Smart Shuffle is not available in the following cases:  
- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera  
- An unsupported image is currently displayed  
- Images are shown in filtered display ( 91)  
- During group playback ( 92)  
95  
   
Choose a selection method.  
2
Before Use  
Protecting Images  
Choose an option as desired ( 29).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
To return to the menu screen, press the  
Still Images  
Movies  
[
] button.  
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure ( 98).  
Press the [ ] button, and then choose  
Camera Basics  
[
] in the menu ( 28). [Protected]  
is displayed.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Choosing Images Individually  
To cancel protection, repeat this process  
and choose [  
the [ ] button.  
] again, and then press  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Choose [Select].  
1
Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”  
(
[
] button.  
Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
the card ( 146).  
Choose an image.  
2
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose an image, and then press  
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.  
]
Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure  
function. To erase them this way, first cancel protection.  
To cancel selection, press the [ ] button  
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.  
Accessories  
Repeat this process to specify other  
images.  
Using the Menu  
Appendix  
Protect the image.  
3
Access the setting screen.  
1
Index  
Press the [  
message is displayed.  
] button. A confirmation  
Press the [  
] button and choose  
[Protect] on the [  
] tab ( 29).  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
[
Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or  
turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3.  
96  
       
Protect the images.  
4
Before Use  
Selecting a Range  
Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
and then press the [ ] button.  
Choose [Select Range].  
1
Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”  
(
Camera Basics  
press the [ ] button.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
You can also choose the first or last image by turning the [ ] dial  
when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.  
To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in  
step 4.  
Choose a starting image.  
2
Press the [ ] button.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Protecting All Images at Once  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose an image, and then press  
the [ ] button.  
Choose [Protect All Images].  
1
Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”  
(
96), choose [Protect All Images]  
and press the [ ] button.  
Protect the images.  
2
Accessories  
Choose an ending image.  
3
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
]
Appendix  
Press the [ ] button to choose [Last  
[
image], and then press the [ ] button.  
Index  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose an image, and then press  
the [ ] button.  
]
Clearing All Protection at Once  
You can clear protection from all images at once.  
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting  
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.  
Images before the first image cannot be  
selected as the last image.  
97  
   
Before Use  
Erasing Multiple Images at Once  
Erasing Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when  
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected  
Still Images  
Movies  
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful  
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,  
protected images ( 96) cannot be erased.  
Camera Basics  
Choosing a Selection Method  
Choose an image to erase.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1
Access the setting screen.  
1
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose an image.  
]
Press the [  
] button, and then  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
choose [Erase] on the [  
] tab ( 29).  
Erase the image.  
2
Press the [ ] button.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
After [Erase?] is displayed, press the  
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to  
Choose a selection method.  
2
choose [Erase], and then press the [  
button.  
]
Choose the desired item ( 29).  
The current image is now erased.  
To return to the menu screen, press the  
[
] button.  
To cancel erasure, press the [ ][  
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose  
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.  
]
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
98  
       
Choosing Images Individually  
Selecting a Range  
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Choose [Select].  
Choose [Select Range].  
1
1
Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection  
Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection  
press the [ ] button.  
Range] and press the [ ] button.  
Camera Basics  
Choose an image.  
Choose images.  
2
2
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Once you choose an image following  
Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”  
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”  
(
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
(
96), [ ] is displayed.  
Erase the images.  
3
To cancel selection, press the [ ] button  
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.  
Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],  
and then press the [ ] button.  
Repeat this process to specify other  
images.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Erase the images.  
3
Press the [  
] button. A confirmation  
message is displayed.  
Specifying All Images at Once  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
Choose [Select All Images].  
[
1
Accessories  
Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection  
Method” ( 98), choose [Select All  
Images] and press the [ ] button.  
Appendix  
Index  
Erase the images.  
2
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
]
[
99  
   
Rotate the image.  
2
Before Use  
Rotating Images  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
dial to choose an image.  
Still Images  
Movies  
The image is rotated 90° each time you  
press the [ ] button.  
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.  
To return to the menu screen, press the  
Choose [ ].  
1
Camera Basics  
[
] button.  
Press the [ ] button, and then choose  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
[
] in the menu ( 28).  
Deactivating Auto Rotation  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates  
images based on the current camera orientation.  
Press the [  
Rotate] on the [  
] button, choose [Auto  
] tab, and then choose  
Rotate the image.  
2
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Press the [ ] or [ ] button, depending  
on the desired direction. Each time you  
press the button, the image is rotated  
90°. Press the [ ] button to complete the  
setting.  
[Off] ( 29).  
Images cannot be rotated ( 100) when you set [Auto Rotate]  
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in  
the original orientation.  
Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]  
Accessories  
(
Appendix  
to [Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and  
rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.  
Using the Menu  
Index  
Choose [Rotate].  
1
Press the [  
] button and choose  
[Rotate] on the [  
] tab ( 29).  
100  
     
Before Use  
Using the Menu  
Tagging Images as Favorites  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Choose [Favorites].  
1
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a  
category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to  
all of those images.  
Press the [  
] button and choose  
[Favorites] on the [  
] tab ( 29).  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Choose an image.  
Press the [ ] button, and then choose  
2
[
] in the menu ( 28).  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
[Tagged as Favorite] is displayed.  
dial to choose an image, and then press  
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
To untag the image, repeat this process  
and choose [ ] again, and then press  
the [ ] button.  
To untag the image, press the [ ] button  
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.  
Repeat this process to choose additional  
images.  
Finish the setup process.  
3
Press the [  
] button. A confirmation  
Accessories  
message is displayed.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
Appendix  
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
[
Index  
Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting  
mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in  
step 3.  
Tagging images as favorites makes it easier to add them when  
creating albums ( 108).  
101  
   
Save the new image.  
4
Before Use  
Editing Still Images  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
]
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
[
Image editing ( 102 –  
The image is now saved as a new file.  
memory card has sufficient free space.  
Camera Basics  
Review the new image.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
5
Resizing Images  
Press the [  
] button.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Processed img.], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
]
Still Images  
Movies  
Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels.  
The saved image is now displayed.  
Choose [Resize].  
1
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Press the [  
] button and choose  
Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting  
[Resize] on the [  
] tab ( 29).  
of [ ] ( 50).  
Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels.  
Choosing [Original image] in step 5 will display the original image.  
Choose an image.  
2
Accessories  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose an image, and then press  
the [ ] button.  
Appendix  
Cropping  
Choose an image size.  
3
Index  
Still Images  
Movies  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose the size, and then press  
the [ ] button.  
]
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file.  
Choose [Cropping].  
1
[Save new image?] is displayed.  
Press the [  
] button, and then  
choose [Cropping] on the [ ] tab  
(
102  
       
Choose an image.  
2
Before Use  
Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio  
after cropping.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose an image, and then press  
the [ ] button.  
]
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than  
uncropped images.  
If you crop still images shot using Face ID ( 45), only the  
( )  
1
( )  
2
( )  
3
Adjust the cropping area.  
3
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.  
Camera Basics  
A frame is displayed around the portion of  
the image to be cropped (1).  
Auto Mode /  
The original image is shown in the upper  
left, and a preview of the image as  
cropped (2) is shown in the lower right.  
You can also see the number of recording  
pixels after cropping (3).  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Still Images  
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a  
Movies  
To resize the frame, move the zoom  
lever.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
To move the frame, press the  
Choose [My Colors].  
1
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.  
Press the [  
] button, and then  
] tab  
To change the frame orientation, press  
the [ ] button.  
choose [My Colors] on the [  
(
Faces detected in the image are  
enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left  
image. Turn the [ ] dial to switch frames,  
which position the cropping area.  
Accessories  
Choose an image.  
2
Press the [  
] button.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
Appendix  
dial to choose an image, and then press  
the [ ] button.  
Save as a new image and review.  
4
Index  
Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”  
Choose an option.  
3
(
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose an option, and then press  
the [ ] button.  
Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting  
Save as a new image and review.  
4
Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”  
(
103  
   
Choose an option.  
3
Before Use  
Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be  
a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the  
desired color.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose an option, and then press  
the [ ] button.  
]
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly  
Camera Basics  
from the color of images shot using My Colors ( 74).  
Save as a new image and review.  
4
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”  
(
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)  
Still Images  
Movies  
For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause  
images to appear grainy.  
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be  
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient  
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects  
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the  
image as a separate file.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.  
If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting  
images using [Low], [Medium], or [High].  
Choose [i-Contrast].  
1
Press the [  
] button, and then  
choose [i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab  
(
Correcting Red-Eye  
Accessories  
Still Images  
Movies  
Appendix  
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the  
corrected image as a separate file.  
Choose an image.  
2
Index  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].  
dial to choose an image, and then press  
the [ ] button.  
1
Press the [  
] button, and then  
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [  
]
tab ( 29).  
104  
     
Choose an image.  
2
Before Use  
Editing Movies  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose an image.  
]
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Correct the image.  
3
You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of movies  
(excluding digest movies,  
Choose [ ].  
Press the [ ] button.  
Camera Basics  
Red-eye detected by the camera is now  
corrected, and frames are displayed  
around corrected image areas.  
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”  
(
87), choose [ ] and press the [  
]
Enlarge or reduce images as needed.  
button.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
The movie editing panel and editing bar  
are now displayed.  
Save as a new image and review.  
4
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
( )  
1
Specify portions to cut.  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and  
then press the [ ] button.  
2
(1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is  
the editing bar.  
The image is now saved as a new file.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [  
or [ ].  
]
Follow step 5 in “Resizing Images”  
(
To view the portions you can cut  
(identified by [ ] on the screen), press  
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to  
move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the movie  
(from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the  
end of the movie by choosing [ ].  
Some images may not be corrected accurately.  
To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose  
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be  
erased.  
Accessories  
( )  
2
Appendix  
Protected images cannot be overwritten.  
If you move [ ] to a position other than a  
Index  
[
] mark, in [ ] the portion before the  
nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,  
while in [ ] the portion after the nearest  
[
] mark on the right will be cut.  
105  
   
Review the edited movie.  
3
Before Use  
Reducing File Sizes  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],  
and then press the [ ] button. The edited  
movie is now played.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Movie file sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.  
On the screen in step 2 of “Editing  
Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File],  
and then press the [ ] button.  
To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.  
To cancel editing, press the [  
button, choose [OK] (either press the  
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and  
]
Camera Basics  
Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
[
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
then press the [ ] button.  
Save the edited movie.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
4
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],  
and then press the [ ] button.  
Compressed movies are saved in [  
] movies cannot be compressed.  
] format.  
[
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and  
then press the [ ] button.  
Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you  
choose [Overwrite].  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
The movie is now saved as a new file.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose  
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be  
Index  
erased.  
If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be  
available.  
Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving  
is in progress.  
When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery  
pack.  
106  
   
Before Use  
Erasing Movie Chapters  
Albums with background music ( 109) cannot be edited.  
] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is  
connected to a printer.  
[
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Individual chapters (clips) ( 35,  
]
mode can be erased. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot  
be recovered.  
Camera Basics  
Select the clip to erase.  
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Play a short movie as described in steps  
1 – 2 of “Viewing Short Movies Recorded  
in Creative Shot Mode (Creative Shot  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Movies)” ( 89) or “Viewing Short  
Movies Created When Shooting Still  
Images (Digest Movies)” ( 90), and  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
then press the [ ] button to access the  
movie control panel.  
To choose the clip, press the [ ][  
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [  
or [ ], and then press the [ ] button.  
]
]
Choose [ ].  
2
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [  
button.  
]
Accessories  
]
Appendix  
The selected clip is played back  
repeatedly.  
Index  
Confirm erasure.  
3
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
[
The clip is erased, and the short movie is  
overwritten.  
107  
   
Choose an image.  
1
Before Use  
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)  
Choose an image in single-image display.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Themes available in step 3 will vary  
depending on image shooting date and  
Face ID information.  
Still Images  
Movies  
You can choose themes such as a date or person’s name to create an  
album of automatically selected images that match the theme. These  
images are combined into a slideshow that can be saved as a short movie  
of about 2 – 3 minutes.  
Before using this feature, make sure the battery pack is fully charged.  
Creating albums also requires free space on the memory card. As a  
guideline, use a memory card with a capacity of 16 GB or higher, and  
ensure at least 1 GB of free space.  
Camera Basics  
Access the home screen.  
2
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Press the [ ] button.  
After [Busy] is displayed, the home  
screen is displayed.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Preview an album.  
3
Choosing Themes for Albums  
Choose a person, [Date], or [Event]  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Press the [ ] button to access the home screen and choose themes for  
the camera to use when selecting album elements. Note that the camera  
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the  
[
] dial) as the album theme, and then  
is more likely to add images tagged as favorites ( 101) to albums.  
press the [ ] button.  
Creates an album of images shot on the same day.  
After [Loading] is displayed for a few  
seconds, the album is played.  
Date  
Images are selected from those shot on the same day as  
the image displayed before you access the home screen.  
Save the album.  
4
Can be used to create monthly albums of people, such as  
albums of children as they grow up.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Save Album as Movie],  
and then press the [ ] button.  
]
Subjects whose Face ID information you registered before  
shooting may be selected for albums.  
Images selected are those that have the same subject  
shot during the same month as the image displayed before  
you access the home screen.  
Accessories  
Person’s  
name  
Appendix  
Once the album is saved, [Saved] is  
displayed.  
Index  
A good choice for albums of vacations, parties, or other  
events.  
Images are selected from those shot during the event  
before and after the image displayed before you access  
the home screen.  
Play the album (=87).  
5
Event  
Includes images based on your specified images, dates, or  
people registered in Face ID.  
Custom  
108  
   
Before Use  
The screen at left is displayed when you  
use a new or recently formatted memory  
card. Choose [OK], press [ ], and  
wait until the seven types of music are  
registered to the card, which takes about  
four minutes.  
Albums can include following images captured by the camera.  
- Still images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
- Digest movies ( 35)  
- Short movie clips ( 69) of two seconds or longer, or  
Creative Shot movies ( 57), except compressed movies  
When using a memory card with music  
Camera Basics  
already registered to it, go to step 2.  
Albums cannot be saved unless there is enough space on the  
memory card.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Create the album.  
2
To jump to the next chapter during the preview, press the [  
]
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
button, and to jump to the previous chapter, press the [ ] button.  
You can specify the color effect in step 4 by choosing [Change  
Color Effect] and pressing the [ ] button. To preview how the  
album looks with your selected effect applied, choose [Preview  
album.  
Configure background music  
settings.  
3
Album Again] on the screen in step 4 after pressing the [ ][  
buttons to choose a color effect and pressing the [ ] button.  
To play saved albums, choose [List of Albums] on the Story  
]
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Choose an item, press the [ ] button,  
Highlights home screen, press the [ ] button, choose a listed  
album, and press the [ ] button again.  
and choose an option ( 29).  
Save the album.  
4
Adding Background Music to Albums  
Accessories  
Still Images  
Movies  
Appendix  
Choose from seven kinds of background music to play during album  
playback.  
Once albums are saved, background music cannot be added  
later. Background music in albums cannot be removed or  
changed.  
Index  
Register background music to a  
memory card.  
1
Chapters of albums with background music cannot be edited  
(
[Music Settings] and press the [  
button.  
]
109  
   
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Preview], and then press  
the [ ] button.  
]
Before Use  
If you prefer not to add background music, set [Add BGM] to [No]  
on the screen in step 3.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
To use only background music instead of movie audio, set [Audio  
Mixer] to [BGM only] on the screen in step 3.  
Choose background music.  
4
To listen to a sample of the background music selected in [Track],  
When the screen at left is displayed,  
choose [Music Settings]. Add background  
music as described in “Adding  
choose [Sample BGM] on the screen in step 3 and press the [  
button.  
]
Camera Basics  
Background Music to Albums” ( 109),  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
and then press the [  
] button.  
Creating Your Own Albums  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Choose a color effect.  
5
Still Images  
Create your own albums by choosing desired images.  
Movies  
choose [Change Color Effect].  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Choose to create a Custom album.  
1
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a  
color effect, and then press the [  
button.  
]
[Custom] and press the [ ] button.  
Save the album.  
6
Choose a selection method.  
2
Choose [Image Selection], [Date  
Selection], or [Person Selection], and  
then press the [ ] button.  
Accessories  
You can specify up to 40 files (or 10 movie files) after choosing  
[Image Selection]. The second time you create a custom album,  
[Select images based on previous settings?] is displayed. To  
use previously selected images as the basis, choose [Yes]. The  
previous stills, clips, or Creative Shot movies are labeled with  
Appendix  
Index  
Choose album elements.  
3
Once you select the elements for your  
album and press the [ ] button, your  
selected elements are labeled with [ ].  
[
], and multiple images are displayed.  
Up to 15 dates can be selected if you choose [Date Selection].  
The color effect may not be applied to some images.  
Press the [  
] button after you  
finish selecting still images, short clips,  
or Creative Shot movies in [Image  
Selection], dates in [Date Selection], or  
people in [Person Selection].  
110  
 
Preview the movie.  
3
Before Use  
Combining Short Clips  
Choose [Preview] and press the [  
]
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
button.  
Still Images  
Movies  
After [Loading] is displayed for a few  
seconds, a preview of the combined clips  
is played.  
Combine short clips to create a longer movie.  
Note that movies created this way are not included in Story Highlights  
albums ( 108).  
Camera Basics  
Save the movie.  
4
Access the editing screen.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1
Choose [Save], and then press the [  
button.  
]
Press the [  
] button, choose  
[Short Clip Mix] on the [ ] tab, and then  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Once the movie is saved, [Saved] is  
displayed.  
choose [Merge  
Clips] ( 29).  
Play the movie.  
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Choose [Play Back  
Movie] on the  
screen in step 1 to view a list of movies  
you have created.  
Specify clips to combine.  
2
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose a clip on the top of the  
screen to combine, and then press the  
]
Choose the movie to play and press the  
] button.  
[
[
] button.  
Your selected clip is displayed on the  
bottom of the screen.  
To play the selected clip, move the zoom lever toward [  
screen in step 2.  
] on the  
Accessories  
To cancel selection, press the [ ] button  
again.  
To rearrange clips, press the [ ] button on the screen in step 2,  
select a clip, press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons or  
turn the [ ] dial, and then press the [ ] button again.  
To apply a color effect, choose [Change Color Effect] on the  
screen in step 3.  
Appendix  
Repeat these steps to specify other clips  
to combine.  
Index  
After you are finished selecting clips,  
To add background music, choose [Music Settings] on the screen  
press the [  
] button.  
in step 3 ( 109).  
The image quality of movies saved is [ ].  
Use a fully charged battery pack, if possible.  
111  
   
Before Use  
Available Wireless Features  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Using Wi-Fi Features  
Camera Basics  
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by  
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.  
Wireless Features  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Smartphones and Tablets  
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-  
Fi functions. Remote live view shooting is also possible from a  
smartphone or tablet.  
For convenience in this guide, smartphones, tablets, and other  
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.  
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible  
devices, and use the camera with Web services  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Computer  
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via  
Wi-Fi.  
Web Services  
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to  
send camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera  
can also be sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY.  
Accessories  
Printers  
Appendix  
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting  
DPS over IP) to print them.  
Index  
Another Camera  
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi-compatible Canon cameras.  
Using Bluetooth® Features  
You can easily pair the camera with a smartphone featuring Bluetooth low  
energy technology*. You can also shoot, view, or geotag images by using  
your smartphone as a remote control.  
* Hereafter referred to as “Bluetooth”.  
112  
   
Before Use  
Transferring Images to a Bluetooth Enabled  
Smartphone  
Sending Images to a Smartphone  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and send  
images.  
Once you have paired with a smartphone via Bluetooth, simply operate  
your smartphone to view and save camera images.  
Connect via Bluetooth  
You can easily connect the camera to a Bluetooth enabled smartphone  
by pairing them. This simplifies transferring images to a smartphone.  
Camera Basics  
Install Camera Connect.  
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
For Android smartphones, find Camera  
Connect in Google Play and download  
and install the app.  
Connect via NFC ( 115)  
Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone against the  
camera to connect the devices.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
For an iPhone or iPad, find Camera  
Connect in the App Store and download  
and install the app.  
Connect via the Wi-Fi menu ( 117)  
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it  
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Register a nickname.  
2
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated  
Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application  
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon  
website.  
Press the power button.  
Press the [  
] button, choose  
[Wireless settings] on the [ ] tab, and  
then choose [Nickname].  
Canon Wi-Fi-compatible camera owners who use CameraWindow  
to connect their camera via Wi-Fi to a smartphone should  
consider switching to the Camera Connect mobile app.  
Press the [ ] button to access the  
nickname.  
Accessories  
To return to [Wireless settings] after  
Appendix  
pressing the [  
] button, press the  
[
] button again.  
Index  
113  
     
Before Use  
Press the [ ] button when the screen at  
left is displayed.  
Prepare for pairing.  
3
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Choose [Bluetooth settings], press the  
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to  
choose [Pairing], and then press the [  
button.  
[
]
Camera Basics  
Transfer images.  
7
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
A screen is displayed indicating that the  
camera is waiting to connect.  
The camera will automatically switch to  
Wi-Fi if you choose [Images on camera]  
in Camera Connect.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
On an iPhone or iPad, in the device’s  
Wi-Fi setting menu, choose the SSID  
(network name) displayed on the camera  
to establish a connection.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Start Camera Connect.  
4
Use the smartphone to transfer images  
from the camera to the smartphone.  
Activate Bluetooth on the smartphone,  
and then start Camera Connect on the  
smartphone.  
To switch to Bluetooth, disable the Wi-Fi  
connection on the smartphone.  
After the camera is recognized, a camera  
selection screen is displayed.  
Battery life may be shorter when you use the camera after pairing,  
because power is consumed even when the camera is off.  
Before bringing the camera to places where the use of electronic  
devices is restricted, set [Bluetooth] to [Off], to avoid having the  
camera ready for Bluetooth communication even when it is off.  
Select the camera to connect to.  
5
Accessories  
Choose the camera nickname.  
Appendix  
Complete the pairing process for the  
smartphone.  
Index  
Complete pairing.  
6
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose [OK] after the confirmation  
message on the camera, and then press  
the [ ] button.  
114  
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in  
Shooting Mode  
Before Use  
Bluetooth connection status is indicated by one of the following  
icons.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
[
] Connected, [ ] Disconnected  
Install Camera Connect.  
You can also use the camera to disable Wi-Fi connection  
described in step 7.  
1
Refer to the smartphone user manual to  
To check the information of the smartphone connected via  
Bluetooth in [Check/clear connection info], choose MENU  
check where the N-Mark ( ) is located.  
Camera Basics  
Activate NFC on the smartphone and  
touch the devices’ N-Marks ( ) together  
to start Google Play on the smartphone  
automatically. Once the Camera Connect  
download page is displayed, download  
and install the app.  
(
29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Bluetooth settings].  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Choose [Address check] to check the camera’s Bluetooth  
address.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Transferring Images to an NFC-Compatible  
Smartphone  
Establish the connection.  
2
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Make sure the camera is off or in  
Use an Android smartphone’s NFC to simplify the process of installing  
Camera Connect and connecting to the camera.  
Operation when devices are initially connected via NFC varies depending  
on the camera mode when the devices are touched together.  
Shooting mode.  
Touch the N-Mark ( ) on the smartphone  
with Camera Connect installed against  
the camera’s N-Mark.  
If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched  
together, you can choose and send images on the image selection  
screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot remotely  
while viewing a shooting screen on the smartphone ( 136). It’s easy  
to reconnect to recent devices, which are listed in the Wi-Fi menu.  
The camera screen automatically  
changes.  
Accessories  
If the [Device Nickname] screen is  
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or  
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
Appendix  
If the camera is in Playback mode when the devices are touched  
together, you can choose and send images from the index display  
shown for image selection.  
Index  
Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection  
to a camera that is off or in Shooting mode.  
Camera Connect is started on the  
smartphone.  
The devices are connected automatically.  
115  
       
Adjust the privacy setting.  
3
Before Use  
When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.  
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This  
may damage the devices.  
When this screen is displayed, press  
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to  
choose [Yes], and then press the [  
button.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
]
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize  
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices  
together in slightly different positions. If connection is not  
established, keep the devices together until the camera screen  
is updated.  
You can now use the smartphone for  
remote live view shooting, or to browse or  
transfer images on the camera.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
- If you attempt connection when the camera is off, a message  
may be displayed on the smartphone reminding you to turn on  
the camera. If so, turn the camera on and touch the devices  
together again.  
Send an image.  
4
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose  
[Send this image], and then press the [  
button.  
]
- Do not place other objects between the camera and  
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or  
similar accessories may block communication.  
[Transfer completed] is displayed after  
the image is sent, and the image transfer  
screen is displayed again.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected  
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera  
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the  
smartphone, choose [No] in step 3.  
To end the connection, press the  
[
] button, choose [OK] on the  
confirmation screen (either press the  
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and  
Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy  
[
settings for it on the camera ( 139).  
then press the [ ] button. You can  
also use the smartphone to end the  
connection.  
Accessories  
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.  
You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in step  
Appendix  
You can also send multiple images at once and change the image  
size before sending ( 132).  
Index  
To disable NFC connections, choose MENU ( 29) > [ ] tab  
> [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [NFC] > [Off].  
116  
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback  
Mode  
Before Use  
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can  
Press the [  
on.  
] button to turn the camera  
also use an existing access point ( 119).  
Touch the smartphone with Camera  
Install Camera Connect.  
1
Connect installed ( 115) against the  
Camera Basics  
camera’s N-Mark ( ).  
For Android smartphones, find Camera  
Connect in Google Play and download  
and install the app.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose an image to send,  
and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is  
displayed.  
For an iPhone or iPad, find Camera  
Connect in the App Store and download  
and install the app.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
To cancel selection, press the [ ] button  
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.  
Access the Wi-Fi menu.  
2
Repeat this process to choose additional  
images.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Press the [ ] button.  
If the [Device Nickname] screen is  
After you finish choosing images, press  
displayed, choose [OK] ( 115).  
the [  
] button.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],  
and then press the [ ] button.  
Choose [ ].  
3
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press  
the [ ] button.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Send], and then press the  
] button.  
]
Accessories  
[
The images are now sent.  
Appendix  
If during connection a message on the camera requests you to  
Index  
Choose [Add a Device].  
4
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
]
The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect  
to via NFC in Playback mode.  
You can preset images to transfer at your desired size ( 132).  
117  
   
Send an image.  
9
Before Use  
The camera SSID and password are  
displayed.  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
[Select and send], and then press the [  
button.  
]
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Select], and then press  
the [ ] button.  
]
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose an image to  
send, press the [ ] button to mark it  
as selected ([ ]), and then press the  
Connect the smartphone to the  
network.  
5
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,  
choose the SSID (network name)  
displayed on the camera to establish a  
connection.  
[
] button.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Send], and then press the  
] button.  
]
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
In the password field, enter the password  
displayed on the camera.  
[
]
Start Camera Connect.  
6
[
Start Camera Connect on the  
smartphone.  
[Transfer completed] is displayed after  
the image is sent, and the image transfer  
screen is displayed again.  
Accessories  
To end the connection, press the  
Select the camera to connect to.  
7
[
] button, choose [OK] on the  
confirmation screen (either press the  
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and  
Appendix  
On the camera selection screen  
displayed on the smartphone, choose the  
camera to begin pairing.  
[
Index  
then press the [ ] button. You can  
also use the smartphone to end the  
connection.  
Adjust the privacy setting.  
8
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the  
] button.  
]
To add multiple smartphones, repeat the  
above procedure starting from step 1.  
[
You can now use the smartphone for  
remote live view shooting, or to browse or  
transfer images on the camera.  
118  
Before Use  
Using Another Access Point  
All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected  
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 8. To keep camera  
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the  
smartphone, choose [No] in step 8.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
When connecting the camera to a smartphone through the Wi-Fi menu,  
you can also use an existing access point.  
Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy  
settings for it on the camera ( 139).  
Prepare for the connection.  
1
Camera Basics  
Access the [Waiting to connect] screen  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.  
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent  
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.  
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to  
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a  
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Connect the smartphone to the  
access point.  
2
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU  
(
29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >  
Choose [Switch Network].  
3
[Target History] > [Off].  
To connect without entering a password in step 5, choose MENU  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Switch Network], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
]
(
29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >  
[Password] > [Off]. [Password] is no longer displayed on the SSID  
screen (in step 4).  
A list of detected access points will be  
displayed.  
You can also send multiple images at once and change the image  
Accessories  
size before sending ( 132).  
You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on  
the screen in step 9.  
Connect to an access point.  
4
Appendix  
For WPS-compatible access points,  
connect to the access point as described  
Index  
For non-WPS access points, follow steps  
access point.  
119  
   
Select the camera to connect to.  
5
Before Use  
Saving Images to a Computer  
On the camera selection screen  
displayed on the smartphone, choose the  
camera to begin pairing.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Preparing to Register a Computer  
Configure the privacy settings and  
send images.  
6
Camera Basics  
For details on computers that you can connect the camera to via Wi-  
Fi, system requirements, and other compatibility information (including  
support in new operating systems), visit the Canon website.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
settings and send images.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.  
Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)  
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media  
Feature Pack.  
Previous Access Points  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
For details, check the following website.  
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by  
To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the  
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose  
[Camera Access Point Mode].  
Installing CameraWindow  
To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen  
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the  
Download the software.  
1
Accessories  
Visit the following site from a computer  
connected to the Internet.  
Appendix  
http://www.canon.com/icpd/  
Index  
Choose your country or region, and  
then follow the instructions displayed to  
prepare for downloading.  
120  
     
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection  
(Windows Only)  
Follow the instructions displayed.  
2
Before Use  
Double-click the downloaded file to install  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
it.  
On a computer running Windows, configure the following settings before  
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.  
Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and  
Confirm that the computer is  
connected to an access point.  
access fees must be paid separately.  
1
Camera Basics  
For instructions on checking your network  
connection, refer to the computer user  
manual.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
To uninstall the software, follow these steps.  
- Windows: Select [Start] menu > [All Programs] > [Canon  
Utilities], and then choose the software for uninstallation.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Configure the setting.  
2
Click in the following order: [Start] menu  
> [All Programs] > [Canon Utilities] >  
[CameraWindow] > [Wi-Fi connection  
setup].  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
In the application that opens, follow the  
on-screen instructions and configure the  
setting.  
The following Windows settings are configured when you run the  
utility in step 2.  
Accessories  
- Turn on media streaming.  
This will enable the camera to see (find) the computer to access  
via Wi-Fi.  
Appendix  
- Turn on network discovery.  
This will enable the computer to see (find) the camera.  
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).  
This allows you to check the network connection status.  
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).  
This will enable network devices to detect each other  
automatically.  
Index  
Some security software may prevent you from completing the  
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security  
software.  
121  
 
Before Use  
Saving Images to a Connected Computer  
For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on  
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.  
A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for  
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal  
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.  
Also refer to the access point user manual.  
This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access  
points”.  
Confirming Access Point Compatibility  
Camera Basics  
Confirm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi  
If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure  
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point  
check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU ( 29)  
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS,  
non-WPS access points, check the following information.  
> [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Check MAC  
Address].  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Network name (SSID/ESSID)  
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the  
“access point name” or “network name”.  
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /  
encryption mode)  
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check  
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK  
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system  
authentication), or no security.  
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over  
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN  
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.  
Confirm that the computer is  
connected to an access point.  
1
Password (encryption key / network key)  
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also  
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.  
For instructions on checking the  
connection, refer to the device and  
access point user manuals.  
Accessories  
Key index (transmit key)  
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data  
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.  
Appendix  
Access the Wi-Fi menu.  
2
Press the [ ] button.  
Index  
If the [Device Nickname] screen is  
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or  
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
If system administrator status is needed to adjust network  
settings, contact the system administrator for details.  
These settings are very important for network security. Exercise  
adequate caution when changing these settings.  
122  
     
Choose [ ].  
3
Before Use  
On the camera, press the [ ] button to  
go to the next step.  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
The camera connects to the access point  
and lists devices connected to it on the  
[Select a Device] screen.  
Camera Basics  
Choose [Add a Device].  
4
Choose the target device.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
8
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
]
]
]
Choose the target device name (either  
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial), and then press the [ ] button.  
]
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Choose [Connect with WPS].  
5
Install a driver (first Windows  
connection only).  
9
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Connect with WPS], and  
then press the [ ] button.  
When this screen is displayed on the  
camera, click the Start menu on the  
computer, click [Control Panel], and then  
click [Add a device].  
Accessories  
Choose [WPS (PBC mode)].  
6
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [WPS (PBC mode)], and  
then press the [ ] button.  
Appendix  
Double-click the connected camera icon.  
Driver installation will begin.  
Index  
After driver installation is complete, and  
the camera and computer connection  
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be  
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on  
the camera screen.  
Establish the connection.  
7
On the access point, hold down the WPS  
connection button for a few seconds.  
123  
Display CameraWindow.  
10  
Before Use  
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent  
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.  
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to  
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a  
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the  
Windows: Access CameraWindow by  
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon  
Camera].  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Import images.  
11  
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.  
Camera Basics  
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU  
Click [Import Images from Camera], and  
(
29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >  
then click [Import Untransferred Images].  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
[Target History] > [Off].  
Images are now saved to the Pictures  
folder on the computer, in separate  
folders named by date.  
You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in step  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen  
is blank.  
Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed  
after image import is complete.  
To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.  
If you chose [WPS (PIN mode)] in step 6, a PIN code will be  
displayed on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access  
point. Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further  
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.  
To view images you save to a computer,  
use preinstalled or commonly available  
software compatible with images  
captured by the camera.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Connecting to Listed Access Points  
View the listed access points.  
1
Accessories  
View the listed networks (access points)  
Appendix  
Index  
Choose an access point.  
2
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose a network (access point),  
and then press the [ ] button.  
]
124  
   
Previous Access Points  
Enter the access point password.  
3
Before Use  
Press the [ ] button to access the  
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
keyboard, and then enter the password  
(
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Next], and then press the  
] button.  
To connect to a device via an access point, confirm that the target  
device is already connected to the access point, and then follow the  
]
Camera Basics  
[
To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen  
displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Choose [Auto].  
4
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the  
] button.  
]
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
[
To save images to a connected computer,  
follow the procedure from step 8 in  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
To determine the access point password, check on the access  
point itself or refer to the user manual.  
If no access points are detected even after you choose [Refresh]  
in step 2 to update the list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2  
to complete access point settings manually. Follow on-screen  
instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.  
When you use an access point that you have already connected  
to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the  
password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next]  
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and press  
the [ ] button.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
125  
 
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY  
Before Use  
Sending Images to a Registered  
Web Service  
Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON  
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. Note  
that you will need to enter an email address used on your computer or  
smartphone to receive a notification message for completing linkage  
settings.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Registering Web Services  
Access the Wi-Fi menu.  
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Press the [ ] button.  
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that  
you want to use.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is  
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY  
and other Web services.  
If the [Device Nickname] screen is  
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or  
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser  
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and  
version information.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE  
You must have an account with Web services other than CANON  
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check  
the websites for each Web service you want to register.  
Choose [  
].  
2
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
Accessories  
the [ ] dial to choose [  
press the [ ] button.  
], and then  
Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.  
Appendix  
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY also provides user guides for  
downloading.  
Index  
Accept the agreement to enter an  
email address.  
3
Read the agreement displayed, press  
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to  
choose [I Agree], and then press the [  
button.  
]
126  
     
Establish a connection with an  
access point.  
Check for the notification message.  
4
7
Before Use  
Once information has been sent to  
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you will  
receive a notification message at the  
email address entered in step 5.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Connect to the access point as described  
Press the [ ] button on the next screen,  
which indicates that notification has been  
sent.  
Camera Basics  
Enter your email address.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
5
[  
] now changes to [  
].  
Once the camera is connected to CANON  
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, a  
screen is displayed for entering an email  
address.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Enter your email address, press the  
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Access the page in the notification  
message and complete camera link  
settings.  
8
choose [Next], and then press the [  
button.  
]
Enter a four-digit number.  
6
From a computer or smartphone,  
access the page linked in the notification  
message.  
Enter a four-digit number of your choice,  
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Next], and then press the  
] button.  
]
Follow the instructions to complete the  
settings on the camera link settings page.  
[
Accessories  
You will need this four-digit number later  
when setting up linkage with CANON  
iMAGE GATEWAY in step 8.  
Complete CANON iMAGE GATEWAY  
settings on the camera.  
9
Appendix  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
Index  
the [ ] dial to choose [  
press the [ ] button.  
], and then  
GATEWAY are now added as  
destinations.  
You can add other Web services,  
as needed. In this case, follow the  
127  
Choose [  
].  
3
Before Use  
Make sure initially that your computer or smartphone mail  
application is not configured to block email from relevant domains,  
which may prevent you from receiving the notification message.  
Press the [ ] button.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose [  
press the [ ] button.  
], and then  
You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in step  
The Web service settings are now  
updated.  
Camera Basics  
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent  
destinations will be listed first when you access the menu. Press  
the [ ][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and then  
configure the setting.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
If any configured settings change, follow these steps again to  
update the camera settings.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Registering Other Web Services  
Uploading Images to Web Services  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the  
camera.  
Access the Wi-Fi menu.  
1
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY  
and access the camera link settings  
page.  
1
Press the [ ] button.  
From a computer or smartphone, access  
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.  
Choose the destination.  
2
Accessories  
Choose the icon of the Web service to  
connect to (either press the [ ][ ][ ][  
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then  
press the [ ] button.  
Configure the Web service you want  
to use.  
]
2
Appendix  
Index  
On the computer or smartphone, display  
the Web service settings screen.  
If multiple recipients or sharing options  
are used with a Web service, choose the  
desired item on the [Select Recipient]  
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons  
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the  
Follow the on-screen instructions to  
complete settings for Web services you  
want to use.  
[
] button.  
128  
     
Send an image.  
3
Before Use  
Printing Images Wirelessly from a  
Connected Printer  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose  
[Select and send], and then press the [  
button.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
]
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Select], and then press  
the [ ] button.  
]
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.  
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can  
Camera Basics  
also use an existing access point ( 119).  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose an image to  
send, press the [ ] button to mark it  
as selected ([ ]), and then press the  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Access the Wi-Fi menu.  
1
Press the [ ] button.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
[
] button.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Send], and then press the  
] button.  
]
Choose [ ].  
2
[
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
]
[
When uploading to YouTube, read the  
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and  
press the [ ] button.  
Choose [Add a Device].  
3
Press the [ ] button to return to the  
playback screen once [OK] is displayed  
after the image is sent.  
Accessories  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
]
Appendix  
Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in  
the camera.  
Index  
You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and  
add comments before sending ( 132).  
The camera SSID and password are  
displayed.  
You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on  
the screen in step 3.  
To view images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on a  
smartphone, try the dedicated Canon Online Photo Album app.  
Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for  
iPhones or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from  
Google Play.  
129  
 
Connect the printer to the network.  
4
Before Use  
Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in  
the camera.  
In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu,  
choose the SSID (network name)  
displayed on the camera to establish a  
connection.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent  
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.  
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to  
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a  
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the  
In the password field, enter the password  
displayed on the camera.  
Camera Basics  
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Choose the printer.  
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU  
5
(
29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >  
Choose the printer name (either press the  
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and  
[Target History] > [Off].  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
[
To connect without entering a password in step 4, choose MENU  
then press the [ ] button.  
(
29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >  
[Password] > [Off]. [Password] is no longer displayed on the SSID  
screen (in step 3).  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Choose an image to print.  
6
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose an image.  
]
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and  
press the [ ] button again.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the  
] button.  
For detailed printing instructions, see  
Accessories  
[
Appendix  
To end the connection, press the [  
]
Index  
button, choose [OK] on the confirmation  
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or  
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [  
button.  
]
130  
Send an image.  
4
Before Use  
Sending Images to Another Camera  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
[Select and send], and then press the [  
button.  
]
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as  
follows.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Select], and then press  
the [ ] button.  
]
Only Wi-Fi compatible Canon cameras can be connected via Wi-Fi.  
You cannot connect to a Canon camera unless it is Wi-Fi compatible,  
even if it supports FlashAir/Eye-Fi cards.  
Camera Basics  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose an image to  
send, press the [ ] button to mark it  
as selected ([ ]), and then press the  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Access the Wi-Fi menu.  
1
Press the [ ] button.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
[
] button.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Send], and then press the  
] button.  
]
[
Choose [ ].  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
2
]
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
[
[Transfer completed] is displayed after  
the image is sent, and the image transfer  
screen is displayed again.  
To end the connection, press the  
Choose [Add a Device].  
Accessories  
3
[
] button, choose [OK] on the  
confirmation screen (either press the  
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and  
then press the [ ] button.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
]
[
Appendix  
Index  
Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera  
too.  
Camera connection information will be  
added when [Start connection on target  
camera] is displayed on both camera  
screens.  
131  
 
Before Use  
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.  
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent  
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.  
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to  
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a  
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the  
Image Sending Options  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image  
recording pixel setting (size) before sending. Some Web services also  
enable you to annotate the images you send.  
Camera Basics  
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.  
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU  
Sending Multiple Images  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
(
29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >  
[Target History] > [Off].  
On the image transfer screen, specify a range of images to send, or send  
only images tagged as favorites.  
You can also send multiple images at once and change the image  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
size before sending ( 132).  
You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on  
the screen in step 4.  
Choose [Select and send].  
1
On the image transfer screen, press the  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Select and  
send], and then press the [ ] button.  
Choose a selection method.  
2
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose a selection method.  
]
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
132  
     
Selecting a Range  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
]
Before Use  
[
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Choose [Select Range].  
1
Send the images.  
Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple  
2
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Send], and then press the  
] button.  
]
Range] and press the [ ] button.  
Camera Basics  
[
Choose images.  
2
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”  
In step 1, [Favorite Images] is not available unless you have  
tagged images as favorites.  
(
To include movies, press the  
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Incl.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
[
Movies], and then press the [ ] button to  
mark the option as selected ( ).  
Notes on Sending Images  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose  
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.  
Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take  
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera  
battery level.  
Send the images.  
3
Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you  
can send.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Send], and then press the  
] button.  
]
[
For movies that you do not compress ( 106), a separate,  
compressed file is sent instead of the original file. Note that this may  
delay transmission, and the file cannot be sent unless there is enough  
space for it on the memory card.  
Sending Favorite Images  
Accessories  
Send only images tagged as favorites ( 101).  
Appendix  
When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image  
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the  
smartphone user manual.  
Choose [Favorite Images].  
1
Index  
Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple  
Images] and press the [ ] button.  
On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following  
icons.  
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak  
An image selection screen for favorites is  
displayed. If you prefer not to include an  
image, choose the image and press the  
Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending  
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY server.  
[
] button to remove [ ].  
Press the [ ] button.  
133  
   
Before Use  
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image  
Size)  
Sending Images Automatically  
(Image Sync)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][  
]
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can  
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.  
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.  
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose  
the recording pixel setting (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons,  
and then press the [ ] button.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.  
Initial Preparations  
Choosing [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected size  
before sending.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Movies cannot be resized.  
Preparing the Camera  
Image size can also be configured in MENU ( 29) > [ ] tab  
Register [ ] as the destination. On the destination computer, you will  
install and configure Image Transfer Utility, free software compatible with  
Image Sync.  
> [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Resize for Sending].  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Add [ ] as a destination.  
1
Adding Comments  
Add [ ] as a destination, as described in  
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send to  
e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of characters  
and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the Web service.  
To include a Web service as the  
destination, log in to CANON iMAGE  
Accessories  
Access the screen for adding  
comments.  
1
model, access the Web service settings  
screen, and choose the destination  
Web service in Image Sync settings.  
For details, refer to CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY Help.  
Appendix  
On the image transfer screen, choose  
Index  
[
] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,  
and then press the [ ] button.  
Add a comment (=30).  
2
3
Send the image.  
When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON  
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.  
You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The  
same comment is added to all images sent together.  
134  
     
Choose the type of images to send  
(only when sending movies with  
images).  
2
Before Use  
Sending Images  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.  
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images  
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.  
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer  
and save the images.  
Press the [  
] button, choose  
[Wireless settings] on the [ ] tab, and  
then choose [Wi-Fi Settings] ( 29).  
Camera Basics  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose  
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][  
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].  
]
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Send images.  
1
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Preparing the Computer  
].  
[
Install and configure the software on the destination computer.  
Sent images are labeled with a [ ] icon.  
Install Image Transfer Utility.  
1
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Save the images to the computer.  
2
Install Image Transfer Utility on a  
computer connected to the Internet  
Images are automatically saved to the  
computer when you turn it on.  
(
“Installing CameraWindow” ( 120).  
Images are automatically sent to Web  
services from the CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY server, even if the computer  
is off.  
Image Transfer Utility can also be  
downloaded from the Image Sync  
settings page of CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY ( 126).  
Accessories  
When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery  
pack.  
Register the camera.  
2
Appendix  
Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],  
and then click [Add new camera].  
Index  
Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [ ], and  
then click [Add new camera].  
Even if images were imported to the computer through a different  
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.  
A list of cameras linked to CANON  
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose  
the camera from which images are to be  
sent.  
Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same  
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access  
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images  
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so  
the computer must be connected to the Internet.  
Once the camera is registered and the  
computer is ready to receive images, the  
icon changes to [ ].  
135  
   
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a  
Smartphone  
Before Use  
Using a Smartphone to View Camera  
Images and Control the Camera  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
By installing the Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) app, you can  
use your smartphone to view and download images sent via Image Sync  
while they are stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY  
server.  
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera  
Connect.  
Camera Basics  
In preparation, enable smartphone access as follows.  
Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Geotag images as you shoot ( 136)  
Control the camera remotely from a smartphone ( 138)  
Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for iPhones  
or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from Google Play.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Privacy settings must be configured in advance to allow image  
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ( 126), select your camera  
viewing on the smartphone ( 117,  
model, access the Web service settings screen, and enable viewing  
and downloading from a smartphone in the Image Sync settings. For  
details, refer to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Geotagging Images When You Shoot  
Once images stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY server have been deleted, they can no longer be  
viewed.  
Still images and movies you shoot can be geotagged using GPS  
information (such as latitude, longitude, and elevation) from a Bluetooth  
enabled smartphone. You can review the recorded GPS information on  
Images you sent before enabling smartphone viewing and  
downloading in Image Sync settings cannot be accessed this way.  
the locations on a map, with the still images and movies shown next to  
them.  
Accessories  
For Canon Online Photo Album instructions, refer to Canon  
Online Photo Album Help.  
Appendix  
Connect the camera and  
smartphone via Bluetooth ( 113).  
1
Index  
Choose [GPS settings].  
2
Press the [  
] button, choose [GPS  
settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press  
the [ ] button.  
136  
     
Before Use  
To check the GPS information acquired from the smartphone,  
Configure the setting.  
3
choose MENU ( 29) > [ ] tab > [GPS settings] > [GPS  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Choose [GPS via Mobile], and then press  
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to  
choose [Enable].  
information display].  
GPS acquisition status is indicated by one of the following icons.  
[
] Acquiring, [  
] Not acquiring  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Shoot.  
4
The still images and movies you shoot  
are now geotagged using smartphone  
GPS information, which you can check as  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Next time, after starting Camera Connect  
on your smartphone, make sure the  
camera and smartphone are connected  
via Bluetooth before shooting.  
Images are not geotagged this way unless Camera Connect is  
running.  
The GPS information added to your movie is acquired initially,  
when you start shooting.  
Accessories  
GPS information cannot be updated unless Wi-Fi is off.  
The GPS information added to images in remote live view  
shooting is acquired initially, when you switch to a Wi-Fi  
connection.  
Appendix  
Index  
Images may not be geotagged if you connect via NFC or  
Bluetooth when the camera is off.  
Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data  
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing  
these images with others, as when posting images online where  
many others can view them.  
137  
 
Before Use  
Controlling the Camera Remotely from a  
Smartphone  
Movie shooting is not available.  
Focusing may take longer.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Image display or shutter release may be delayed, depending on  
the connection status.  
Controlling the Camera via Wi-Fi  
Camera Basics  
You can shoot as you view a shooting screen on your smartphone.  
Any rough subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the  
connection environment will not affect recorded images.  
Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the  
smartphone to browse and transfer images from the camera.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Privacy settings must be configured in advance to allow viewing  
of all images from the smartphone ( 117).  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Controlling the Camera via Bluetooth  
Secure the camera.  
1
Keep the camera still by mounting it on a  
tripod or taking other measures.  
You can use a Bluetooth enabled smartphone for remote shooting and  
switching of image display.  
This is convenient if you want to connect quickly while shooting, or if you  
will control playback while connected to a TV.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Connect the camera and  
2
smartphone ( 117).  
Prepare the camera.  
1
In the privacy settings, choose [Yes].  
Set the shooting mode and the shooting  
Choose remote live view shooting.  
functions on the camera.  
3
Keep the camera still by mounting it on  
a tripod or taking other measures when  
shooting.  
In Camera Connect on the smartphone,  
choose [Remote live view shooting].  
Accessories  
Once the camera is ready for remote  
live view shooting, a live image from the  
camera is displayed on the smartphone.  
Appendix  
Connect the camera and  
2
Index  
smartphone ( 113).  
At this time, a message is displayed on  
the camera, and all operations except  
pressing the power button are disabled.  
Make sure that the Bluetooth connection  
has been established.  
Choose Bluetooth remote controller.  
3
Shoot.  
4
In Camera Connect on the smartphone,  
choose [Bluetooth remote controller].  
Use the smartphone to shoot.  
The smartphone screen changes to a  
screen for remote control via Bluetooth.  
138  
   
Shoot and switch images.  
4
Before Use  
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings  
Use the smartphone to shoot in Shooting  
mode and switch images in Playback  
mode.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.  
[Bluetooth remote controller] is not available when connected via  
Wi-Fi.  
Editing Connection Information  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose  
a device to edit.  
1
You can check the Bluetooth connection status by referring to the  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
icon on the screen ( 113).  
Press the [ ] button.  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose the icon of a  
device to edit, and then press the [  
button.  
]
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Choose [Edit a Device].  
2
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
]
]
Accessories  
Choose the device to edit.  
3
Appendix  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose the device to edit, and then  
press the [ ] button.  
Index  
Choose the item to edit.  
4
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose the item to edit, and then  
press the [ ] button.  
The items you can change depend on the  
device or service.  
139  
   
Specifying Images Viewable from Smartphones  
Before Use  
Connection  
Specify whether all images on the camera’s memory card can be viewed  
from smartphones connected to the camera.  
Configurable Items  
Web  
Services  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Choose [View Settings] in step 4  
of “Editing Connection Information”  
[Change Device Nickname]  
O
O
O
O
(
(
O
O
[View Settings] ( 117)  
Camera Basics  
O
O
O
[Erase Connection Info] ( 140)  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
O
: Configurable : Not configurable  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Changing a Device Nickname  
For remote live view shooting, choose [On].  
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on  
the camera.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Device Nickname] and press the [  
button.  
]
Select the input field and press the [  
]
button. Use the keyboard displayed to  
enter a new nickname ( 30).  
Accessories  
Erasing Connection Information  
Appendix  
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have  
connected to) as follows.  
Index  
Connection Info] and press the [  
button.  
]
After [Erase?] is displayed, press the  
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to  
[
choose [OK], and then press the [  
button.  
]
The connection information will be  
erased.  
140  
     
Before Use  
Changing the Camera Nickname  
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Change the camera nickname (displayed on connected devices) as  
desired.  
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the  
camera to another person, or dispose of it.  
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be  
sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.  
Choose [Wireless settings].  
1
Camera Basics  
Press the [  
] button and choose  
Choose [Wireless settings].  
1
[Wireless settings] on the [ ] tab  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
(
Press the [  
] button and choose  
[Wireless settings] on the [ ] tab  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
(
Choose [Nickname].  
2
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the  
] dial to choose [Nickname], and then  
Choose [Reset Settings].  
2
[
press the [ ] button ( 29).  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then  
press the [ ] button.  
]
Change the nickname.  
3
Restore the default settings.  
3
Press the [ ] button to access the  
Accessories  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
]
nickname.  
Appendix  
[
The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.  
Index  
To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose  
A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with  
a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different  
nickname.  
[Reset camera] on the [ ] tab ( 149).  
You can also change the nickname from the [Device Nickname]  
screen displayed when you first use Wi-Fi. In this case, select the  
text box, press the [ ] button to access the keyboard, and then  
enter a new nickname.  
141  
     
Before Use  
Clearing Information of Devices  
Paired via Bluetooth  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Before pairing with a different smartphone, clear the information about any  
connected smartphones.  
Camera Basics  
Choose [Bluetooth settings].  
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Press the [  
] button and choose  
[
] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Bluetooth  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
settings].  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Choose [Check/clear connection  
info].  
2
Choose [Check/clear connection info],  
and then press the [ ] button.  
Accessories  
Clear the information.  
3
Appendix  
On the [Check/clear connection info]  
screen, press the [ ] button.  
Index  
After [Clear information about devices  
you have connected to] is displayed,  
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
[
Clear the camera information.  
4
In the Bluetooth setting menu on the  
smartphone, clear the camera information  
registered on the smartphone.  
142  
 
Before Use  
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Basic camera functions are configured on the [ ] tab of the MENU  
convenience.  
(
Camera Basics  
Silencing Camera Operations  
Setting Menu  
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Choose [Mute], and then choose  
[Enable].  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [  
button as you turn the camera on.  
]
Sound is not played during movies ( 87) if you mute camera  
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [ ] button.  
Adjust volume with the [ ][ ] buttons, as needed.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Adjusting the Volume  
Index  
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.  
Choose [Volume], and then press the [  
]
button.  
Choose an item, and then press the  
[
][ ] buttons to adjust the volume.  
143  
     
Before Use  
Hiding Hints and Tips  
World Clock  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. ( 28) or  
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when  
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to  
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the  
Date/Time setting manually.  
MENU ( 29) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.  
Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose  
[Off].  
Camera Basics  
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Specify your destination.  
1
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Choose [Time Zone], and then press the  
[
] button.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose [ World], and then press  
the [ ] button.  
Date and Time  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the  
destination.  
Adjust the date and time as follows.  
Choose [Date/Time], and then press the  
To set daylight saving time (1 hour  
ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the  
[
] button.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an  
item, and then adjust the setting, either  
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning  
the [ ] dial.  
[
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial,  
and then choose [ ] by pressing the  
][ ] buttons.  
[
Accessories  
Press the [ ] button.  
Appendix  
Switch to the destination time zone.  
2
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [ World], and then press  
the [ ] button.  
[ ] is now shown on the shooting screen  
]
Index  
(
Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode ( 20) will  
automatically update your [ Home] time and date.  
144  
       
Before Use  
Lens Retraction Timing  
Power-Saving Adjustment  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press  
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto  
the [  
] button in Shooting mode ( 25). To have the lens retracted  
Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed ( 26).  
immediately after you press the [  
] button, set the retraction timing to [0  
Choose [Power Saving], and then press  
the [ ] button.  
sec.].  
Camera Basics  
Choose [Lens Retraction], and then  
choose [0 sec.].  
After choosing an item, press the [ ][  
buttons to adjust it as needed.  
]
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for  
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Using Eco Mode  
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.  
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce  
battery consumption.  
The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power  
Down] to [Off].  
These power-saving functions are not available when you have  
set Eco mode ( 145) to [On].  
Configure the setting.  
1
Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose [On].  
Accessories  
[  
] is now shown on the shooting  
Screen Brightness  
screen ( 170).  
Appendix  
The screen darkens when the camera  
is not used for approximately two  
seconds; approximately ten seconds  
after darkening, the screen turns off.  
The camera turns off after approximately  
three minutes of inactivity.  
Adjust screen brightness as follows.  
Index  
Choose [Disp. Brightness], and then  
press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the  
brightness.  
Shoot.  
2
To activate the screen and prepare for  
shooting when the screen is off but the  
lens is still out, press the shutter button  
halfway.  
145  
         
Before Use  
Formatting Memory Cards  
For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button for at  
least one second when the shooting screen is displayed or when  
in single-image display. (This will override the [Disp. Brightness]  
setting on the [ ] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press  
and hold the [ ] button again for at least one second or restart  
the camera.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,  
you should format the card with this camera.  
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy  
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back  
them up.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Access the [Format] screen.  
1
Hiding the Start-Up Screen  
Choose [Format], and then press the [  
button.  
]
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
If you prefer, you can deactivate display of the start-up screen normally  
shown when you turn the camera on.  
Choose [OK].  
2
Choose [Start-up Image], and then  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
choose [Off].  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
[
] button.  
Format the memory card.  
3
To begin the formatting process, press  
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial  
to choose [OK], and then press the [  
button.  
Accessories  
]
Appendix  
When formatting is finished, [Memory  
card formatting complete] is displayed.  
Press the [ ] button.  
Index  
Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file  
management information on the card and does not erase the data  
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,  
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by  
physically destroying cards.  
146  
     
Before Use  
File Numbering  
The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be  
less than the advertised capacity.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)  
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change  
how the camera assigns file numbers.  
Low-Level Formatting  
Choose [File Numbering], and then  
choose the desired option.  
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is  
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing  
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly  
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-  
level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take  
other steps to back them up.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting  
Memory Cards” ( 146), press the  
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to  
[
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
choose [Low Level Format], and then  
press the [ ][ ] buttons to select this  
option. A [ ] icon is displayed.  
Continuous  
Auto Reset  
shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory  
cards.  
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch  
memory cards, or when a new folder is created.  
Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory  
formatting process.  
Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be  
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images  
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,  
Accessories  
use an empty (or formatted,  
of the memory card.  
Appendix  
You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing  
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card  
can be used normally.  
Index  
147  
     
Before Use  
Date-Based Image Storage  
Checking Certification Logos  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the  
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.  
Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be  
viewed on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on  
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.  
Choose [Create Folder], and then choose  
[Daily].  
Choose [Certification Logo Display], and  
then press the [ ] button.  
Camera Basics  
Images will now be saved in folders  
created on the shooting date.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Metric / Non-Metric Display  
Display Language  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar ( 33), the  
Change the display language as needed.  
Choose [Language ], and then press  
the [ ] button.  
Choose [Units], and then choose [ft/in].  
Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn  
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and  
then press the [ ] button.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by  
pressing and holding the [ ] button and immediately pressing  
the [  
] button.  
148  
         
Before Use  
Adjusting Other Settings  
The following functions are not restored to default settings.  
- Information registered using Face ID ( 45)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
- [ ] tab settings [Date/Time] ( 144), [Time Zone] ( 144),  
The following settings can also be adjusted on the [ ] tab.  
[Language  
] ( 148), and [Video System] ( 152)  
[Video System] ( 152)  
- Custom white balance data you have recorded ( 73)  
[Wireless settings] ( 112)  
- Shooting mode chosen in [  
Camera Basics  
- Movie mode ( 67)  
- Information registered in [Wireless settings] ( 112)  
[GPS settings] ( 136)  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Restoring Default Camera Settings  
Restoring Defaults for Individual Functions  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera  
settings.  
Settings for the following functions can be restored to defaults individually.  
Face ID information  
Restoring All Camera Defaults  
Wireless settings  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Access the [Other settings] screen.  
1
Access the [Basic settings] screen.  
1
Choose [Reset camera] on the [ ] tab,  
and then press the [ ] button.  
Choose [Reset camera] on the [ ] tab,  
and then press the [ ] button.  
Choose [Other settings] and press the  
Choose [Basic settings], and then press  
the [ ] button.  
[
] button.  
Restore default settings.  
2
Accessories  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
Appendix  
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
All camera defaults are now restored.  
[
Choose the function to reset.  
2
Index  
Choose the function to reset, and then  
press the [ ] button.  
Restore default settings.  
3
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
]
[
Default function settings are now  
restored.  
149  
   
Before Use  
System Map  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Included Accessories  
Battery Pack  
NB-13L*  
Battery Charger  
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE*  
Camera Basics  
1
1
Wrist Strap  
Accessories  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
2
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and  
other compatible accessories sold separately  
USB Cable (camera end: Micro-B)*  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Memory Card  
Card Reader  
Computer  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
HDMI Cable  
(camera end: Type D)*  
TV/Video  
System  
3
PictBridge-Compatible Printers  
Power  
Accessories  
Connect Station  
CS100  
Appendix  
Compact Power  
Adapter  
CA-DC30/  
Index  
CA-DC30E  
*1 Also available for purchase separately.  
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-600PCU).  
*3 Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.).  
150  
 
Before Use  
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.  
Optional Accessories  
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used  
with genuine Canon accessories.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that  
availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be  
available.  
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents  
such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon  
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please  
note that any repairs your Canon product may require as a result of such  
malfunction are not covered under warranty and will incur a fee.  
Camera Basics  
Power Supplies  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Battery Pack NB-13L  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Charger for Battery Pack NB-13L  
The battery charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC  
power (50/60 Hz).  
For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially  
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer  
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.  
The message [Battery communication error] is displayed if you  
use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is  
required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages  
resulting from accidents, such as malfunction or fire, that occur  
due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can  
attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so  
that  
is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that  
is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.  
151  
 
Compact Power Adapter  
CA-DC30/CA-DC30E  
Before Use  
Using Optional Accessories  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Insert the included battery pack into the  
camera for charging. Interface Cable IFC-  
600PCU (sold separately) is required to  
connect the adapter to the camera.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Movies  
Playback on a TV  
Camera Basics  
Still Images  
Other Accessories  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger  
screen of the TV.  
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Interface Cable IFC-600PCU  
For connecting the camera to a computer  
or printer.  
Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on  
a TV ( 171).  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Printers  
Playback on a High-Definition TV  
Still Images  
Movies  
You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV  
with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m / 8.2  
ft., with a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at an image  
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible  
Printers  
quality of [  
], [  
], or [  
] can be viewed in high definition.  
Even without using a computer, you can  
print images by connecting the camera  
directly to a printer.  
For details, visit your nearest Canon  
retailer.  
Accessories  
Make sure the camera and TV are  
off.  
1
Appendix  
Index  
Connect the camera to the TV.  
2
On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into  
the HDMI input as shown.  
Photo and Movie Storage  
Connect Station CS100  
A media hub for storing camera images,  
viewing on a connected TV, printing  
wirelessly on a Wi-Fi-compatible printer,  
sharing over the Internet, and more.  
152  
     
Before Use  
On the camera, open the terminal cover  
and insert the cable plug fully into the  
camera terminal.  
Inserting and Charging the Battery  
Pack  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Charge the battery pack by using the supplied battery pack with an  
optional Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E and Interface  
Cable IFC-600PCU.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Insert the battery pack.  
1
Turn the TV on and switch to  
external input.  
3
Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery  
Pack and Your Memory Card” ( 18)  
to open the cover.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Switch the TV input to the external input  
you connected the cable to in step 2.  
Insert the battery pack as described in  
Turn the camera on.  
step 2 of “Inserting the Battery Pack and  
4
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Your Memory Card” ( 19).  
Press the [  
on.  
] button to turn the camera  
Follow step 4 in “Inserting the Battery  
Pack and Your Memory Card” ( 19)  
to close the cover.  
Images from the camera are now  
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is  
displayed on the camera screen.)  
Connect the compact power adapter  
to the camera.  
2
When finished, turn off the camera and  
TV before disconnecting the cable.  
( )  
2
With the camera turned off, open the  
cover (1). Hold the smaller plug of the  
interface cable (sold separately) facing  
as shown and insert the plug fully into the  
camera terminal (2).  
Accessories  
Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is  
connected to an HDTV.  
( )  
1
Appendix  
Index  
Insert the larger plug of the interface  
cable into the compact power adapter.  
153  
   
Charge the battery pack.  
3
Before Use  
For details on charging time and the number of shots and  
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see  
CA-DC30: Flip out the plug (1) and plug  
the compact power adapter into a power  
outlet (2).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
You can view images even while the battery is charging, by  
turning the camera on and entering Playback mode ( 23).  
However, you cannot shoot while the battery is charging.  
If the USB charge lamp is not lit, reconnect the interface cable.  
Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when  
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately  
before) the day of use.  
Camera Basics  
CA-DC30E: Plug the power cord into the  
compact power adapter, then plug the  
other end into a power outlet.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power  
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a  
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an  
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage  
the battery pack.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Charging begins and the USB charge  
lamp lights up.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
The lamp turns off when charging  
finishes.  
Remove the compact power adapter from  
the power outlet and the interface cable  
from the camera.  
Accessories  
To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not  
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.  
When charging another battery pack, always disconnect the  
interface cable from the camera before replacing the battery pack  
for charging.  
Appendix  
Index  
154  
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery  
Before Use  
Using the Software  
You can also charge the battery pack by inserting the larger plug of the  
interface cable into a computer’s USB terminal in step 2 of “Inserting and  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
To utilize the features of the following software, download the software  
from the Canon website and install it on your computer.  
Charging the Battery Pack” ( 153). For details about USB connections  
on the computer, refer to the computer user manual. We recommend  
using Interface Cable IFC-600PCU (sold separately).  
CameraWindow  
Camera Basics  
- Import images to your computer  
With the camera turned off, open the  
cover. With the smaller plug of the cable  
in the orientation shown, insert the plug  
fully into the camera terminal.  
Image Transfer Utility  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
- Set up Image Sync ( 134) and receive images  
Map Utility  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
- Use a map to view GPS information that has been added to images  
To view and edit images on a computer, use preinstalled or  
commonly available software compatible with images captured by  
the camera.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Connect the larger cable plug to the  
computer. For details on computer  
connections, refer to the computer user  
manual.  
Image Transfer Utility can also be downloaded from the Image  
Sync settings page of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.  
Charging now begins, and the indicator  
on the back of the camera blinks in  
green. Charging will be finished in about  
four hours.  
Accessories  
However, charging may take longer if  
you import images on the camera to  
Appendix  
Index  
The indicator continues to blink in green  
even after charging is finished, as long as  
the camera is connected to the computer.  
Charging stops and the indicator goes off if, after you begin  
charging as described above, you press the power button to turn  
the camera off.  
With some computers, battery charging may require the memory  
card to be in the camera. Insert the memory card in the camera  
(
155  
     
Before Use  
Connect the larger cable plug to the  
computer. For details on computer  
connections, refer to the computer user  
manual.  
Computer Connections via a Cable  
Checking Your Computer Environment  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
The camera automatically turns on when  
you connect it to the computer.  
For detailed software system requirements and compatibility information  
(including support in new operating systems), visit the Canon website.  
Camera Basics  
Display CameraWindow.  
2
Installing the Software  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed  
when a connection is established  
between the camera and computer.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Windows: Follow the steps introduced  
below.  
To uninstall (remove) the software in Mac OS, in the [Canon  
Utilities] folder within the [Applications] folder, drag the folder of  
the software for uninstallation to the Trash, and then empty the  
Trash.  
In the screen that is displayed, click the  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
change program link of [  
].  
Choose [Downloads Images From Canon  
Camera] and then click [OK].  
Saving Images to a Computer  
Using a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B), you can  
connect the camera to the computer and save images to the computer.  
Accessories  
Connect the camera to the  
computer.  
1
Double-click [  
].  
Appendix  
( )  
2
With the camera turned off, open the  
cover (1). With the smaller plug of the  
USB cable in the orientation shown,  
insert the plug fully into the camera  
terminal (2).  
Index  
( )  
1
156  
     
Save the images to the computer.  
3
Before Use  
Printing Images  
Click [Import Images from Camera], and  
then click [Import Untransferred Images].  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Images are now saved to the Pictures  
folder on the computer, in separate  
folders named by date.  
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer.  
On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare  
orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print  
images for photobooks.  
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the  
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by  
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.  
Camera Basics  
After images are saved, close  
CameraWindow, press the [  
] button to  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.  
To view images you save to a computer,  
use preinstalled or commonly available  
software compatible with images  
captured by the camera.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Easy Print  
Still Images  
Movies  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [  
icon in the taskbar.  
]
Print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible  
printer with a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B).  
Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the  
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.  
Make sure the camera and printer  
Although you can save images to a computer simply by  
connecting your camera to the computer without using the  
software, the following limitations apply.  
1
are off.  
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the  
computer until camera images are accessible.  
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal  
orientation.  
Connect the camera to the printer.  
2
Accessories  
Open the terminal cover. Holding the  
smaller cable plug in the orientation  
shown, insert the plug fully into the  
camera terminal.  
Appendix  
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved  
to a computer.  
Connect the larger cable plug to the  
printer. For other connection details, refer  
to the printer manual.  
Index  
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image  
information, depending on the operating system version, the  
software in use, or image file sizes.  
Turn the printer on.  
3
157  
     
Turn the camera on.  
4
Before Use  
Configuring Print Settings  
Press the [  
] button to turn the camera  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
on.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Access the printing screen.  
1
Choose an image.  
5
Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”  
Camera Basics  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose an image.  
]
(
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Configure the settings.  
2
Access the printing screen.  
6
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose an item, and then choose  
an option by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.  
]
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and  
press the [ ] button again.  
Default  
Date  
Matches current printer settings.  
Print the image.  
7
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Prints images with the date added.  
Prints images with the file number added.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [Print], and then press the  
] button.  
]
File No.  
[
Prints images with both the date and file  
number added.  
Both  
Printing now begins.  
Off  
Default  
Off  
To print other images, repeat the above  
procedures starting from step 5 after  
printing is finished.  
Matches current printer settings.  
When you are finished printing, turn the  
camera and printer off and disconnect  
the cable.  
Uses information from the time of shooting to  
print under optimal settings.  
Accessories  
On  
Appendix  
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.  
No. of  
Choose the number of copies to print.  
For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),  
Index  
Copies  
Specify a desired image area to print  
Cropping  
(
Paper  
Settings  
Specify the paper size, layout, and other  
details ( 159).  
158  
   
Cropping Images before Printing  
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing  
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still Images  
Movies  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area  
instead of the entire image.  
Choose [Paper Settings].  
1
After following step 1 in “Configuring Print  
Choose [Cropping].  
1
Camera Basics  
After following step 1 in “Configuring Print  
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and  
press the [ ] button.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the  
[
] button.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
A cropping frame is now displayed,  
indicating the image area to print.  
Choose a paper size.  
2
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose an option, and then press  
the [ ] button.  
Adjust the cropping frame as  
needed.  
2
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
To resize the frame, move the zoom  
lever.  
To move the frame, press the  
Choose a type of paper.  
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.  
3
To rotate the frame, turn the [ ] dial.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose an option, and then press  
the [ ] button.  
When finished, press the [ ] button.  
Accessories  
Print the image.  
3
Appendix  
Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” ( 157)  
to print.  
Index  
Choose a layout.  
4
Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some  
aspect ratios.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose an option.  
]
Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with  
[Date Stamp ] selected.  
When choosing [N-up], press the [ ][  
]
buttons to specify the number of images  
per sheet.  
Press the [ ] button.  
Print the image.  
5
159  
     
Available Layout Options  
Before Use  
Printing Movie Scenes  
Default  
Bordered  
Matches current printer settings.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Prints with blank space around the image.  
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.  
Access the printing screen.  
1
N-up  
Choose how many images to print per sheet.  
Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”  
at left is displayed.  
Camera Basics  
Prints images for identification purposes.  
Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of  
L and an aspect ratio of 4:3.  
(
ID Photo  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Choose the print size.  
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.  
Choose a printing method.  
2
Fixed Size  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the  
] dial to choose [ ], and then press  
[
Printing ID Photos  
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the printing  
method.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Print the image.  
3
Choose [ID Photo].  
1
Movie Printing Options  
Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing  
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”  
Single  
Prints the current scene as a still image.  
(
the [ ] button.  
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on  
a single sheet of paper. You can also print the folder  
number, file number, and elapsed time for the frame by  
setting [Caption] to [On].  
Sequence  
Choose the long and short side  
length.  
2
Accessories  
Appendix  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose an item. Choose the length  
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then  
press the [ ] button.  
To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],  
and then press the [ ] button again.  
Index  
After displaying a scene to print as described in steps 2 – 5 of  
“Viewing” (  
87), you can also access the screen in step 1  
here by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ] in the movie  
control panel and then pressing the [ ] button.  
Choose the printing area.  
3
Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before  
area.  
Print the image.  
4
160  
 
Before Use  
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)  
Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the  
printer or photo development service, in some cases.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
[
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the  
memory card has print settings that were configured on another  
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may  
overwrite all previous settings.  
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a  
memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of  
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will  
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both  
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.  
Configuring Print Settings  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-  
compatible printers (sold separately).  
Still Images  
Movies  
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and  
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print  
list.  
The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/  
Time] on the [ ] tab ( 19).  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Press the [  
choose [Print Settings] on the [ ] tab.  
Choose and configure items as desired  
] button, and then  
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images  
Still Images  
Movies  
(
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].  
1
Press the [  
] button, choose  
[Select Images & Qty.] on the [ ] tab,  
and then press the [ ] button.  
Accessories  
Standard  
Index  
One image is printed per sheet.  
Smaller versions of multiple images are  
printed per sheet.  
Appendix  
Choose an image.  
2
Print Type  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose an image, and then press  
the [ ] button.  
]
Both standard and index formats are  
printed.  
Index  
Both  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
Images are printed with the shooting date.  
Date  
You can now specify the number of  
copies.  
Images are printed with the file number.  
If you specify index printing for the  
image, it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To  
cancel index printing for the image, press  
the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer  
displayed.  
File No.  
All image print list settings are cleared  
after printing.  
On  
Off  
Clear  
DPOF data  
161  
       
Clearing All Images from the Print List  
Specify the number of prints.  
3
Before Use  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to specify the number of prints (up  
to 99).  
]
Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing  
for Individual Images” ( 161), choose  
[Clear All Selections] and press the [  
button.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
]
To set up printing for other images and  
specify the number of prints, repeat steps  
2 – 3.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
Camera Basics  
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
Printing quantity cannot be specified for  
index prints. You can only choose which  
images to print, by following step 2.  
[
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
When finished, press the [  
to return to the menu screen.  
] button  
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)  
Still Images  
Movies  
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images  
When images have been added to the  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Still Images  
Movies  
print list ( 161 –  
is displayed after you connect the camera  
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press  
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],  
and then simply press the [ ] button to  
print the images in the print list.  
Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing  
for Individual Images” ( 161), choose  
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.  
Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”  
(
Any DPOF print job that you temporarily  
stop will be resumed from the next image.  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose  
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.  
Accessories  
Setting Up Printing for All Images  
Appendix  
Still Images  
Movies  
Index  
Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing  
for Individual Images” ( 161), choose  
[Select All Images] and press the [  
button.  
]
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
[
162  
         
Choose an image.  
2
Before Use  
Adding Images to a Photobook  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
]
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
dial to choose an image, and then press  
the [ ] button.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images  
on a memory card and transferring them into the software on your  
computer, where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient  
when ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your  
own printer.  
[ ] is displayed.  
To remove the image from the photobook,  
press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no  
longer displayed.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Repeat this process to specify other  
images.  
Choosing a Selection Method  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
When finished, press the [  
] button  
Press the [  
[Photobook Set-up] on the [  
then choose how you will select images.  
] button, choose  
] tab, and  
to return to the menu screen.  
Adding All Images to a Photobook  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Still Images  
Movies  
[Select All Images] and press the [  
button.  
]
[
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the  
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
]
memory card has print settings that were configured on another  
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may  
overwrite all previous settings.  
[
Accessories  
Appendix  
Adding Images Individually  
Removing All Images from a Photobook  
Still Images  
Movies  
Index  
Still Images  
Movies  
Choose [Select].  
1
[Select] and press the [ ] button.  
[Clear All Selections] and press the [  
button.  
]
]
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [  
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
] button.  
[
163  
     
Before Use  
Troubleshooting  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following.  
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer  
Support Help Desk.  
Camera Basics  
Power  
Appendix  
Helpful information when using the camera  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.  
Confirm that the battery pack is charged ( 18).  
Confirm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way ( 18).  
Confirm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed ( 18).  
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals  
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.  
Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery  
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals  
do not touch any metal objects.  
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals  
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.  
If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon  
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.  
The lens is not retracted.  
Accessories  
Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the  
cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again ( 18).  
Appendix  
The battery pack is swollen.  
Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if  
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a  
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.  
Index  
Display on a TV  
Camera images look distorted or are not displayed on a TV ( 152).  
164  
 
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the  
shutter button is pressed halfway.  
Before Use  
Shooting  
To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the  
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter  
button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Cannot shoot.  
Strange display on the screen under low light ( 27).  
Subjects in shots look too dark.  
Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] ( 81).  
Camera Basics  
Strange display on the screen when shooting.  
Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation ( 71).  
Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast ( 72,  
Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are  
recorded in movies.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Use AE lock or spot metering ( 71,  
-
The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent  
or LED lighting.  
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] ( 33).  
Full-screen display is not available while shooting ( 50).  
Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation ( 71).  
Use AE lock or spot metering ( 71,  
No date stamp is added to images.  
Reduce the lighting on subjects.  
Configure the [Date Stamp ] setting ( 42). Note that date stamps are not  
added to images automatically, merely because you have configured the [Date/  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Shots look too dark despite the flash firing ( 36).  
Time] setting ( 19).  
Shoot within flash range ( 181).  
]
Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash  
output level ( 82,  
Increase the ISO speed ( 72).  
[ ] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting  
is not possible ( 36).  
Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.  
Shoot within flash range ( 181).  
Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] ( 33).  
[
] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway ( 36).  
Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] ( 83).  
Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] ( 81).  
Increase the ISO speed ( 72).  
Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,  
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure  
Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash  
Accessories  
output level ( 82,  
White spots appear in flash shots.  
Appendix  
This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles.  
the camera ( 83).  
Shots look grainy.  
Index  
Shots are out of focus.  
Lower the ISO speed ( 72).  
High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images ( 59).  
Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the  
way down to shoot ( 26).  
Make sure subjects are within focusing range ( 181).  
Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] ( 54).  
Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.  
Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock ( 77,  
Subjects are affected by red-eye.  
Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] ( 54). The red-eye reduction lamp ( 4)  
will light up for flash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye  
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at  
closer range.  
Edit images using red-eye correction ( 104).  
165  
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is  
slower.  
Playback stops, or audio skips.  
Before Use  
Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the  
camera ( 147).  
Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card ( 147).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards  
that have slow read speeds.  
When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may  
skip if computer performance is inadequate.  
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.  
Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in  
Each Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” ( 172 –  
Camera Basics  
The Babies or Children icon is not displayed.  
Sound is not played during movies.  
The Babies and Children icons will not be displayed if the birthday is not set in  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
in the movie is faint.  
the birthday, re-register face information ( 46), or make sure that the date/  
No sound is played for movies shot in [ ] ( 62), [ ] ( 69), or [  
]
(
time is set correctly ( 144).  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Cannot access the Story Highlights home screen by pressing the [  
button.  
]
Shooting Movies  
Home screen display is not possible when connected to a printer. Disconnect the  
camera from the printer.  
Home screen display is not possible during Wi-Fi connections. End the Wi-Fi  
connection.  
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports  
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the  
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time  
A desired subject icon for an album is not displayed on the Story  
Highlights home screen.  
(
In simple information display mode ( 88), choose an image that shows the  
name of the person for the album before accessing the Story Highlights home  
[
] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.  
The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to  
screen ( 108).  
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.  
-
-
-
Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card ( 147).  
Lower the image quality ( 51).  
Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording ( 182).  
Accessories  
Memory Card  
Zooming is not possible.  
Appendix  
The memory card is not recognized.  
Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [ ] ( 62), [ ] ( 69),  
Restart the camera, with the memory card in it ( 25).  
and [  
Index  
Subjects look distorted.  
Computer  
Cannot transfer images to a computer.  
Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a  
malfunction.  
When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the  
Playback  
transfer speed as follows.  
-
Press the [  
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [  
] button  
down as you press the [ ] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next  
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.  
Playback is not possible.  
Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename  
files or alter the folder structure.  
166  
Cannot resize images for sending.  
Before Use  
Wi-Fi  
Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the recording pixel setting of their  
original size.  
Movies cannot be resized.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [ ] button.  
The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer  
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.  
or computer via a cable. Disconnect the cable.  
Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce  
sending time ( 134).  
Movies may take a long time to send.  
Cannot add a device/destination.  
Camera Basics  
A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase  
Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference such as  
microwave ovens or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band. Note that  
images may take a long time to send even when [  
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as  
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.  
unneeded connection information from the camera first, and then add new  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
devices/destinations ( 139).  
Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services ( 126).  
] is displayed.  
To add a smartphone, first install the dedicated application Camera Connect on  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
your smartphone ( 117).  
To add a computer, first install the software CameraWindow on your computer.  
No notification message is received on a computer or smartphone after  
adding CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera.  
Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings ( 120,  
Make sure the email address you entered is correct, and try adding the  
destination again.  
Check the email settings on the computer or smartphone. If they are configured to  
block email from certain domains, you may not be able to receive the notification  
message.  
Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference such as  
microwave ovens or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band.  
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as  
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Cannot connect to the access point.  
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the  
camera or giving it to someone else.  
Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the  
specify a supported channel manually.  
Reset the Wi-Fi settings ( 141).  
Cannot send images.  
Accessories  
The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space  
on the destination device and resend the images.  
The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to  
the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.  
Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you  
move or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images sent  
Appendix  
Index  
using Image Sync via an access point ( 134). Before moving or renaming  
these image files or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already  
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.  
167  
Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle/Cannot  
rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Unselectable image./No  
identification information  
Before Use  
On-Screen Messages  
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.  
Shooting or Playback  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or  
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that  
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.  
(
Camera Basics  
Photobook Set-up* ( 163).  
No memory card  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory  
Invalid selection range  
card facing the correct way ( 18).  
When specifying a range for image selection ( 97,  
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Memory card locked  
The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch  
Exceeded selection limit  
the write-protect switch to the unlocked position ( 18).  
More than 998 images were selected for Print List ( 161) or Photobook Set-up  
(
Cannot record!  
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.  
You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect ( 96), Erase  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a  
memory card facing the correct way ( 18).  
(
(
Memory card error ( 147)  
If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a  
Naming error!  
(
The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the  
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been  
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders  
has been reached. On the [ ] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]  
Insufficient space on card  
There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot ( 33,  
Accessories  
(
(
Lens Error  
Appendix  
Charge the battery ( 18)  
This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is  
used in dusty or sandy locations.  
Frequent display of this error message may indicate damage. In this case,  
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.  
No Image.  
Index  
The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.  
Protected! ( 96)  
A camera error was detected (error number)  
If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not  
Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back  
MOV/Cannot play back MP4  
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.  
Frequent display of this error message may indicate damage. In this case, write  
down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.  
Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.  
It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a  
computer, or images shot with another camera.  
168  
 
File Error  
Sending failed  
Memory card error  
Before Use  
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is  
connected to the printer.  
If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted  
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help  
Desk.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Print error  
Check the paper size setting ( 159). If this error message is displayed when  
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera  
again.  
Receiving failed  
Insufficient space on card  
Camera Basics  
There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to  
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a  
memory card with sufficient space.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Ink absorber full  
Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink  
absorber replacement.  
Receiving failed  
Memory card locked  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images  
is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked  
position.  
Wi-Fi  
Connection failed  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings ( 122).  
A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the  
connection.  
Receiving failed  
Naming error!  
When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)  
Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.  
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.  
Cannot determine access point  
Insufficient space on server  
The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try  
reconnecting again.  
Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create  
space.  
Save the images sent via Image Sync ( 134) to your computer.  
No access points found  
Accessories  
Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.  
When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the  
correct SSID.  
Check network settings  
Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current  
network settings.  
Appendix  
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings  
Index  
Check the access point security settings ( 122).  
IP address conflict  
Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another.  
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed  
You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.  
Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens and other  
devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.  
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as  
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.  
Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.  
169  
(22) AF frame ( 77), Spot AE point  
(31) Hybrid Auto mode ( 35)  
Before Use  
frame ( 71)  
On-Screen Information  
(32) Zoom bar ( 33)  
(23) Date stamp ( 42)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
(33)  
Auto ( 40)  
(24) i-Contrast ( 72)  
(34) Wind filter ( 68)  
(25) AE lock ( 71), FE lock  
Shooting (Information Display)  
(35) Time zone ( 144)  
(
(36) Image stabilization ( 83)  
Camera Basics  
(
)
32  
(26) Shutter speed ( 84,  
(37)  
(38)  
Auto level ( 52)  
(
)( )( )( ) ( )(  
)
(
) (  
)
12 13 14 15 16 17  
18 19  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
(27) Aperture value ( 85,  
(
)
Auto slow shutter ( 68)  
33  
(
)
20  
(
)
1
(28) Exposure level ( 85)  
(
31  
)
(39) MF indicator ( 75)  
(
2
(
3
(
4
)
)
)
(
21  
)
)
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
(29) ISO speed ( 72)  
(40) Exposure compensation level  
(
22  
(30) Grid lines ( 52)  
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
5
6
7
(
) ( ) ( ) (  
34 35 36 37  
)
(
38  
)
* In [  
] mode, indicates the number of shots available.  
( )  
8
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
(
9
(
(
)
)
10  
23  
Battery Level  
(
)
(
11  
24  
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.  
(
25  
)
(
26  
)
(
27  
)
(
28  
)
(
) (  
)
29 30  
Display  
Details  
(
40  
)
(
39  
)
Sufficient charge  
(1) Shooting mode ( 172),  
(12) Bluetooth connection status  
Slightly depleted, but sufficient  
(
Scene icon ( 37)  
Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack  
soon  
(2) Flash mode ( 81)  
(13) IS mode icon ( 38)  
(Blinking red)  
Accessories  
(3) Flash exposure compensation /  
Flash output level  
(14) Battery level ( 170)  
Depleted—charge the battery pack  
immediately  
[Charge the battery]  
(15) Still image compression ( 83),  
Appendix  
(
Recording pixel setting ( 50)  
(4) Metering method ( 71)  
Index  
(16) Recordable shots ( 182)*  
(5) Drive mode ( 80)  
(17) Movie quality ( 51)  
(6) Mercury lamp correction ( 51)  
(18) Remaining time ( 182)  
(7) White balance ( 73)  
(19) Zoom magnification ( 39),  
(8) Self-timer ( 43)  
Digital tele-converter ( 77)  
(9) My Colors ( 74)  
(20) Focus range ( 75,  
AF lock ( 80)  
(10) Eco mode ( 145)  
(21) Connected via Bluetooth to a  
(11) Camera shake warning ( 36)  
smartphone and acquiring GPS  
information ( 137)  
170  
       
(28) Compression (image quality)  
(29) Still images: Recording pixel  
Before Use  
Playback (Detailed Information Display)  
(
setting ( 182)  
Movies: Playback time ( 182)  
(30) File size  
(
51), MP4 (movies)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
( )( ) ( )( )( )( )( )( )( ) (  
)
(
12  
)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11  
( )  
1
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on  
Camera Basics  
a TV ( 152).  
(
)
(
) ( ) (  
)
(
) (  
)
18  
19 20 21  
22 23  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Summary of Movie Control Panel  
(
)
(
26  
)
(
)
(
)
(
30  
)
24  
28  
29  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
The following operations are available on the movie control panel,  
(
)
(
)
27  
25  
Play  
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][  
buttons or turn the [ ] dial. No sound is played.)  
]
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
(1) Movie playback ( 33,  
(15) Aperture value ( 85,  
(16) Exposure compensation level  
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip ( 107) (To continue skipping  
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)  
(
(
(2) Current image no. / Total no. of  
images  
(17) ISO speed ( 72)  
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [  
button.)  
]
(18) Metering method ( 71)  
(3) Histogram ( 89)  
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)  
(4) Battery level ( 170)  
compensation ( 82)  
Skip Forward* or Next Clip ( 107) (To continue skipping  
Accessories  
(5) Wi-Fi signal strength ( 133)  
(20) White balance ( 73)  
(21) Mercury lamp correction ( 51)  
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)  
(6) Bluetooth connection status  
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie, Creative Shot movie,  
Appendix  
(
or album movie is selected ( 107))  
(22) My Colors ( 74,  
(7) Image Sync ( 134)  
Creative Shot effect ( 57)  
Index  
Edit ( 105)  
(8) Image editing ( 102), Movie  
(23) Focus range ( 75,  
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible  
compression ( 106)  
(24) Red-eye correction ( 104),  
Short clip playback effect  
printer ( 157).  
(9) Favorites ( 101)  
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.  
(10) Protection ( 96)  
(11) Folder number - File number  
(25) i-Contrast ( 72)  
During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the  
previous or next clip) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.  
(
(26) Image quality / Frame rate  
(12) Shooting date/time ( 19)  
(movies) ( 50,  
Albums ( 108)  
(13) Shooting mode ( 172)  
(27) Group playback ( 92)  
(14) Shutter speed ( 84,  
171  
   
Before Use  
Functions and Menu Tables  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode  
Camera Basics  
Shooting Mode  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Function  
Exposure Compensation ( 71)  
*1  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flash ( 81)  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*2  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*2  
*2  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Aperture Value ( 85)  
Shutter Speed ( 85)  
Program Shift ( 71)  
O
*3  
*3  
O
O
4
AE Lock ( 71)/FE Lock ( 82)*  
O
O
AE Lock (Movie)/Exposure Shift ( 67)  
O
O
Focus Range ( 75,  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Accessories  
/
Screen Display  
Information Display/No Information Display  
Appendix  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Tracking AF Subject Selection ( 78)  
Change Shooting Display ( 27)  
Index  
O
O
O
O
O
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
*1 Set in [Brightness] ( 58).  
*2 Not available, but switches to [ ] in some cases.  
*3 Aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO speed may be changed  
automatically to maintain suitable exposure.  
*4 FE lock not available in [ ] flash mode.  
172  
     
Before Use  
FUNC. Menu  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Shooting Mode  
Function  
Light Metering ( 71)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Camera Basics  
/
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
My Colors ( 74)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
/
*
/
*1 / *1 /  
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
2
White Balance ( 73)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
ISO Speed ( 72)  
AUTO  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
80 / 100 / 200 / 400 / 800 / 1600 / 3200  
Shooting Mode ( 59)  
Self-Timer ( 43)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
/
/
Accessories  
Self-Timer Settings ( 44)  
Delay*  
Shots*  
3
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Appendix  
4
Flash Exposure Compensation ( 82)  
Flash Output Level ( 86)  
O
Index  
O
*1 White balance is not available.  
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
*2 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red,  
green, blue, and skin tone.  
*3 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number  
of shots.  
*4 One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the  
number of shots.  
173  
       
Before Use  
Shooting Mode  
Function  
Drive Mode ( 80)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Camera Basics  
1
*
O
Still Image Aspect Ratio ( 50)  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
*2  
*2  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Recording Pixels ( 50)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
/
/
Compression ( 83)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Movie Quality ( 51)  
*3  
*3  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Accessories  
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
Appendix  
*1  
[
] is set with [  
], AF lock, or [ ].  
*2 Set automatically to suit the aspect ratio of the movie recording size.  
*3 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set  
Index  
(
174  
Before Use  
Shooting Tab  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Shooting Mode  
Function  
Face AiAF*  
Tracking AF  
Center  
AF Frame ( 77)  
1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Camera Basics  
O
O
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
O
O
O
O
O
O
2
AF Frame Size ( 77)*  
Normal  
Small  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Digital Zoom ( 39)  
Standard  
Off  
1.6x/2.0x  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Servo AF ( 79)  
Enable  
Disable  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*3  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Continuous AF ( 79)  
Enable  
Disable  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Accessories  
*1 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode.  
*2 Available when the AF frame is set to [Center].  
*3 [Enable] when subject movement is detected.  
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
Appendix  
Index  
175  
   
Before Use  
Shooting Mode  
Function  
AF-assist Beam ( 54)  
On  
Off  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
MF-Point Zoom ( 75)  
Off  
2x/4x  
Camera Basics  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Safety MF ( 75)  
On  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
On  
MF Peaking Settings ( 76)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Peaking  
Off  
Level  
Color  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Low/High  
Red/Blue/Yellow  
Auto  
Manual  
Flash settings ( 54,  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flash Mode  
O
Flash Exp. Comp  
Flash Output  
See “Flash Exposure Compensation” in “FUNC. Menu” ( 173).  
See “Flash Output Level” in “FUNC. Menu” ( 173).  
Red-Eye Lamp  
On/Off  
On  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Accessories  
Safety FE  
Appendix  
i-Contrast ( 72)  
Auto  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Index  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Hg Lamp Corr. ( 51)  
On  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
176  
Before Use  
Shooting Mode  
Function  
Safety shift ( 85)  
On  
Off  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Wind Filter ( 68)  
Auto  
Off  
Camera Basics  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Attenuator ( 68)  
Off/On  
Auto  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto slow shutter (=68)  
Disable  
Enable  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Review image after shooting ( 55)  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Display Time  
Display Info  
Quick  
2 sec./4 sec./8 sec./Hold  
O
O
Off  
Detailed  
Grid Lines ( 52)  
On/Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Accessories  
Reverse Display ( 28)  
On  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Appendix  
IS Settings ( 83)  
Index  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
IS Mode  
Continuous  
Shoot Only  
Low  
Standard  
High  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Dynamic IS  
O
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
177  
Before Use  
Shooting Mode  
Function  
Auto level (=52)  
Enable  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Disable  
O
O
O
Display Area (=40)  
Large/Medium/Small  
Auto Settings (=40, =42)  
Camera Basics  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
On  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Seek Assist  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Face/Upper Body/Whole  
Body/Manual/Auto  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Zoom  
O
O
O
O
O
Date Stamp  
Off  
Date / Date & Time  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Digest Type ( 35)  
Include Stills/No Stills  
O
Face ID Settings ( 46)  
On  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Face ID  
O
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
- When using Face ID ( 45) in some modes or with some settings,  
names of people may be recorded in shots even when not displayed.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
178  
 
Before Use  
Set Up Tab  
Playback Tab  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Item  
Reference Page  
Item  
Reference Page  
Mute  
Play Creative Shot Movies  
Short Clip Mix  
Album Playback  
List/Play Digest Movies  
Slideshow  
Volume  
Camera Basics  
Hints & Tips  
Date/Time  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Time Zone  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Lens Retraction  
Eco Mode  
Erase  
Protect  
Power Saving  
Disp. Brightness  
Start-up Image  
Format  
Rotate  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Favorites  
Photobook Set-up  
i-Contrast  
File Numbering  
Create Folder  
Units  
Red-Eye Correction  
Cropping  
Resize  
Accessories  
Video System  
Wi-Fi connect’n  
Wireless settings  
GPS settings  
Certification Logo Display  
My Colors  
Appendix  
Face ID Info  
Transition Effect  
Index Effect  
Scroll Display  
Group Images  
Auto Rotate  
Resume  
Index  
Language  
Reset camera  
179  
   
Before Use  
Print Tab  
Handling Precautions  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Item  
Reference Page  
The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or  
subjecting it to strong impact.  
Print  
Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that  
generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction  
or erase image data.  
Select Images & Qty.  
Camera Basics  
Select Range  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Select All Images  
Clear All Selections  
Print Settings  
If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with  
a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply  
force.  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera  
or screen.  
Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult,  
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.  
Playback Mode FUNC. Menu  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden  
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to  
warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic  
bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it  
from the bag.  
Item  
Reference Page  
Rotate  
Protect  
Favorites  
If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.  
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove  
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has  
evaporated before resuming use.  
Print  
Accessories  
Group Playback  
Play Movie  
Play Linked Digest Movie  
Smart Shuffle  
Image Search  
Slideshow  
Appendix  
Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To  
maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for  
some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until  
it runs out of power before storing the battery pack.  
Index  
180  
 
Shutter  
Before Use  
Specifications  
Shutter Speed  
Auto Mode (automatic settings)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Max. Tv.........................................1 sec.  
Min. Tv..........................................1/3200 sec.  
Range in all shooting modes  
Max. Tv.........................................15 sec.  
Min. Tv..........................................1/3200 sec.  
Available Tv values (sec.)  
Image Sensor  
Image size ........................................1/2.3 type  
Camera Effective Pixels  
(Image processing may cause a  
decrease in the number of pixels.)....Approx. 20.3 megapixels  
Total Pixels........................................Approx. 21.1 megapixels  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Shooting mode .............................M mode / Tv mode  
15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2,  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Lens  
1.6, 1.3, 1, 0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3,  
1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10, 1/13, 1/15,  
1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60,  
1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200,  
1/250, 1/320, 1/400, 1/500, 1/640,  
1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250, 1/1600,  
1/2000, 1/2500, 1/3200  
Focal Length  
(35mm film equivalent) .....................4.3 ‒ 172.0 mm  
(24 ‒ 960 mm)  
Zoom Magnification ..........................40x  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Shooting Range (measured from the tip of the lens)  
Shooting  
Mode  
Focus  
Range  
Maximum Wide Angle  
Maximum Telephoto  
Aperture  
(
)
(
)
1.0 cm (0.4 in.) ‒ infinity 2 m (6.6 ft.) ‒ infinity  
5.0 cm (2.0 in.) ‒ infinity 2 m (6.6 ft.) ‒ infinity  
*
F number  
Wide angle........................................3.3 ‒ 8.0  
Telephoto..........................................6.9 ‒ 8.0  
Other than  
the above  
1.0 – 50.0 cm  
Accessories  
(0.4 in. – 1.6 ft.)  
Flash  
Appendix  
* Manual Focus is the same.  
Built-in Flash  
Flash Range (Max. wide angle)  
Index  
closest point..................................Approx. 50.0 cm (1.6 ft.)  
farthest point.................................Approx. 4 m (13.1 ft.)  
Flash Range (Telephoto end)  
closest point..................................Approx. 2 m (6.6 ft.)  
farthest point.................................Approx. 2 m (6.6 ft.)  
181  
         
Monitor  
Recording  
Before Use  
Type......................................................TFT color liquid crystal  
Screen size...........................................3.0 type  
File Format............................................DCF-compliant DPOF compatible  
(Version1.1)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Data Type  
Still Image  
Effective pixels......................................Approx. 0.92 million dots  
Recording Format.........................Exif2.3 (DCF2.0)  
Image............................................JPEG only  
Movie  
Recording Format.........................MP4  
Video.............................................MPEG-4 AVC/H.264  
Audio ............................................MPEG-4 AAC-LC (stereo)  
Camera Basics  
Shooting  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Digital zoom  
Magnification.....................................Approx. 4x  
Maximum with Optical Zoom ............Approx. 160x  
Focal Length (Telephoto end,  
35mm film equivalent).......................Approx. 3840 mm equivalent  
ZoomPlus  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Recorded Pixels, Number of shots per a memory card  
Still Image  
(Number of recording pixels L) .........Approx. 80x  
Using a 16 GB (UHS-I) memory card (Approx. shots)  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Continuous Shooting  
Shooting speed*  
1766  
2980  
10798  
3546  
5925  
Auto/P Normal Continuous  
Continuous shooting speed......Max approx. 5.9 shots/sec  
P Continuous AF  
Continuous shooting speed......Max approx. 4.6 shots/sec  
* Continuous shooting speed may become slower due to the following factors:  
Tv value/Av value/Subject conditions/Brightness/Shooting with flash/  
Zoom positions/ Battery level  
Accessories  
9344  
16755  
53992  
80988  
Appendix  
Index  
182  
     
Interface  
Movie  
Size  
Before Use  
Single Clip  
Recording Time  
(Approx.)  
Recording time  
per a memory card  
(Approx.)  
Recording file  
size (Approx.)  
Wired  
Digital terminal  
(Hi-Speed USB compliant)................Micro USB  
HDMI OUT terminal ..........................Type D  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
4288 KB/sec  
2945 KB/sec  
992 KB/sec  
382 KB/sec  
29 min. 59 sec.  
29 min. 59 sec.  
29 min. 59 sec.  
59 min. 59 sec.  
59 min. 30 sec.  
(1920 x 1080)  
(1920 x 1080)  
(1280 x 720)  
(640 x 480)  
Wireless  
Camera Basics  
1 hr. 26 min. 5 sec.  
4 hr. 5 min. 15 sec.  
NFC ..................................................NFC Forum Type 3/4 Tag  
compliant (Dynamic)  
Bluetooth  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Compliance standards..................Bluetooth Ver. 4.1  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
(Bluetooth low energy technology)  
Transmission method ...................GFSK modulation  
Wi-Fi  
10 hr. 22 min. 35  
sec.  
Compliance standards..................IEEE 802.11b/g/n  
Transmission frequency  
Frequency.................................2.4 GHz  
Channels ..................................1-11ch  
Security  
Infrastructure mode ..................WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP),  
WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP), WEP  
* Wi-Fi Protected Setup compliant  
Camera access point mode......WPA2-PSK (AES)  
Ad hoc mode ............................WPA2-PSK (AES)  
Continuous shooting is possible until the memory card becomes full  
or the recording length for one movie reaches approx. 29 minutes 59  
seconds.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Power  
Battery Pack .........................................NB-13L  
Number of still image shots (CIPA  
Approx. 250 shots  
compliant: room temperature 23 °C / 73 °F)  
Number of still image shots (Eco Mode  
Accessories  
Approx. 355 shots  
On)  
Operating Environment  
Movie recording time (CIPA compliant:  
Approx. 50 min.  
Appendix  
room temperature 23 °C / 73 °F)  
Temperature..........................................Min. 0 °C, Max. 40 °C  
(Min. 32 °F, Max. 104 °F)  
Movie recording time (Continuous  
Approx. 85 min.  
Index  
Shooting)  
Dimensions (CIPA compliant)  
Playback Time*  
Approx. 5 hr.  
* Time when playing back a slideshow of still images  
W ..........................................................110.1 mm (4.3 in.)  
H ...........................................................63.8 mm (2.5 in.)  
D ...........................................................39.9 mm (1.6 in.)  
183  
     
Weight (CIPA compliant)  
Battery Pack NB-13L  
Before Use  
Type:  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
3.6 V DC  
1250 mAh  
Including Battery Pack,  
Memory Card........................................Approx. 300 g (approx. 10.6 oz.)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Nominal Voltage:  
Nominal Capacity:  
Charging Cycles:  
Camera Body Only ...............................Approx. 276 g (approx. 9.7 oz.)  
Approx. 300 times  
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)  
Camera Basics  
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Rated Input:  
100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)  
0.09 A (100 V) – 0.06 A (240 V)  
4.2 V DC, 0.7 A  
Rated Output:  
Charging Time:  
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Approx. 2 hr. 10 min. (when using NB-13L)  
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Rated Input:  
100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)  
0.07 A (100 V) – 0.045 A (240 V)  
5.0 V DC, 0.55 A  
Approx. 5 hr.* (when charged with NB-13L in  
the camera)  
Rated Output:  
Charging Time:  
* Charging time varies considerably depending on  
the remaining battery level.  
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)  
Accessories  
The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement  
guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).  
Appendix  
Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording  
time may be less than mentioned above.  
Index  
Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.  
184  
   
Flash  
Playback Viewing  
Before Use  
Index  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Flash exposure compensation 82  
A
D
Date/time  
Focusing  
Camera Basics  
L
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Servo AF 79  
M
Defaults Reset all  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Focus range  
B
Batteries Date/time (date/time  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
FUNC. menu  
battery)  
Battery pack  
Menu  
E
Editing  
Editing or erasing connection  
Movies  
G
Accessories  
C
Appendix  
Exposure  
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 126  
H
Index  
Handheld night scene (shooting  
P
I
F
Image quality Compression ratio  
(image quality)  
Images  
Playback Viewing  
185  
 
Power 151 Battery charger,  
Shooting  
Before Use  
Battery pack  
Shooting date/time Date/time  
Printing 157 Printing  
Program AE 70  
W
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Software  
Camera Basics  
R
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Wrist strap Strap  
Z
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
Saving images to a computer  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
S
Screen  
T
Menu FUNC. menu, Menu  
Toy camera effect (shooting mode)  
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards  
Accessories  
Memory cards  
Tracking AF 78  
Appendix  
Index  
Wink self-timer (shooting mode)  
Sending images to another camera  
Sending images to Web services 126  
Servo AF 79  
V
186  
Precautions for Wireless Features (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth,  
or Others)  
Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.  
Be sure to use the wireless function of this product within the  
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for  
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other  
than as described in this guide.  
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Countries and Regions Permitting Wireless Function Use  
- Use of wireless functions is restricted in some countries and  
regions, and illegal use may be punishable under national or local  
regulations. To avoid violating wireless regulations, visit the Canon  
website to check where use is allowed.  
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from  
wireless function use in other countries and regions.  
Do not use the wireless function of this product near medical  
equipment or other electronic equipment.  
Use of the wireless function near medical equipment or other  
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Radio Wave Interference Precautions  
Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:  
- Altering or modifying the product  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
This product may receive interference from other devices that emit  
radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far  
away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the  
same time as this product.  
- Removing the certification labels from the product  
Before goods or technologies in the camera regulated by the Foreign  
Exchange and Foreign Trade Act are exported (which includes  
bringing them outside Japan or showing them to non-residents in  
Japan), export or service transaction permission may be required from  
the Japanese government.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
Security Precautions  
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions  
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.  
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.  
Because this product includes American encryption items, it falls under  
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to or  
brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.  
Only use networks you are authorized to use.  
Be sure to make notes of the Wi-Fi settings you use.  
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays  
the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use  
(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to  
connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized  
access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and  
do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks.  
The wireless settings saved to this product may change or be erased  
due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio waves or  
static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Please note that Canon  
accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss of  
earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
When transferring ownership, disposing of the product, or sending it  
for repair, restore the default wireless settings by erasing any settings  
you have entered.  
Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or  
theft of the product.  
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from  
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this  
product due to loss or theft of the product.  
187  
   
Third-Party Software  
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may  
occur.  
Before Use  
expat.h  
Transmission monitoring  
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions  
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd  
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining  
a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the  
"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including  
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,  
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit  
persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the  
following conditions:  
Unauthorized network access  
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to  
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.  
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access  
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain  
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where  
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard  
to cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems).  
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be  
included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.  
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly  
secure your Wi-Fi network.  
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of  
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security  
settings.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF  
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN  
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,  
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE  
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.  
Accessories  
Appendix  
Index  
188  
 
Personal Information and Security Precautions  
This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard  
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or  
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for  
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider  
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant  
video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4  
standard.  
Before Use  
If personal information and/or Wi-Fi security settings, such as passwords,  
etc., are saved on the camera, please be aware that such information and  
settings may still remain in the camera.  
When transferring the camera to another person, disposing of it, or  
sending it for repair, be sure to take the following measures to prevent the  
leakage of such information and settings.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Disclaimer  
Erase registered personal information by choosing [Erase Info] in the  
Face ID settings.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.  
Erase registered Wi-Fi security information by choosing [Reset  
Other Shooting Modes  
P Mode  
All measurements based on Canon testing standards.  
Settings] in the Wi-Fi settings.  
Information subject to change without notice, as are product  
specifications and appearance.  
Trademarks and Licensing  
Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the  
actual equipment.  
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
Tv, Av, and M Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wireless Features  
Setting Menu  
The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any  
loss arising from the use of this product.  
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the  
U.S. and other countries.  
App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.  
The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are  
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.  
Accessories  
Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™  
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.  
Appendix  
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned  
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is  
under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their  
respective owners.  
Index  
The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.  
in the United States and in other countries.  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.  
189  
 

Xantrex Technology Dr1512 User Manual
White Rodgers Air Cleaner Sst1000 User Manual
Vtech Vt 9122 User Manual
Sanyo 85464359982001 User Manual
Nikon Mh 71 User Manual
HARMAN JBL XTREME 2 GUNMETAL User Manual
BROTHER HL L2312D User Manual
BLACK DECKER TS2020 User Manual
ASUS Z9PA D8 User Manual
ASUS X302L User Manual